WO2002081840A1 - Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing - Google Patents

Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2002081840A1
WO2002081840A1 PCT/US2002/010610 US0210610W WO02081840A1 WO 2002081840 A1 WO2002081840 A1 WO 2002081840A1 US 0210610 W US0210610 W US 0210610W WO 02081840 A1 WO02081840 A1 WO 02081840A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
plank
piece
siding
main
spline
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2002/010610
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Jerrico Q. Colada
James A. Gleeson
Donald J. Merkley
Weiling Peng
Noel E. Thompson
Original Assignee
James Hardie Research Pty Limited
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=23076341&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=WO2002081840(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by James Hardie Research Pty Limited filed Critical James Hardie Research Pty Limited
Priority to NZ528776A priority Critical patent/NZ528776A/en
Priority to BR0208620-4A priority patent/BR0208620A/en
Priority to AU2002248752A priority patent/AU2002248752B2/en
Priority to KR1020037013034A priority patent/KR100853733B1/en
Priority to JP2002579591A priority patent/JP4020384B2/en
Priority to EP02717770A priority patent/EP1377716A1/en
Priority to MXPA03009031A priority patent/MXPA03009031A/en
Priority to CA002443158A priority patent/CA2443158A1/en
Publication of WO2002081840A1 publication Critical patent/WO2002081840A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04CSTRUCTURAL ELEMENTS; BUILDING MATERIALS
    • E04C2/00Building elements of relatively thin form for the construction of parts of buildings, e.g. sheet materials, slabs, or panels
    • E04C2/02Building elements of relatively thin form for the construction of parts of buildings, e.g. sheet materials, slabs, or panels characterised by specified materials
    • E04C2/04Building elements of relatively thin form for the construction of parts of buildings, e.g. sheet materials, slabs, or panels characterised by specified materials of concrete or other stone-like material; of asbestos cement; of cement and other mineral fibres
    • E04C2/06Building elements of relatively thin form for the construction of parts of buildings, e.g. sheet materials, slabs, or panels characterised by specified materials of concrete or other stone-like material; of asbestos cement; of cement and other mineral fibres reinforced
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B13/00Layered products comprising a a layer of water-setting substance, e.g. concrete, plaster, asbestos cement, or like builders' material
    • B32B13/02Layered products comprising a a layer of water-setting substance, e.g. concrete, plaster, asbestos cement, or like builders' material with fibres or particles being present as additives in the layer
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B28WORKING CEMENT, CLAY, OR STONE
    • B28BSHAPING CLAY OR OTHER CERAMIC COMPOSITIONS; SHAPING SLAG; SHAPING MIXTURES CONTAINING CEMENTITIOUS MATERIAL, e.g. PLASTER
    • B28B1/00Producing shaped prefabricated articles from the material
    • B28B1/002Producing shaped prefabricated articles from the material assembled from preformed elements
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B13/00Layered products comprising a a layer of water-setting substance, e.g. concrete, plaster, asbestos cement, or like builders' material
    • B32B13/04Layered products comprising a a layer of water-setting substance, e.g. concrete, plaster, asbestos cement, or like builders' material comprising such water setting substance as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B13/06Layered products comprising a a layer of water-setting substance, e.g. concrete, plaster, asbestos cement, or like builders' material comprising such water setting substance as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of metal
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B13/00Layered products comprising a a layer of water-setting substance, e.g. concrete, plaster, asbestos cement, or like builders' material
    • B32B13/04Layered products comprising a a layer of water-setting substance, e.g. concrete, plaster, asbestos cement, or like builders' material comprising such water setting substance as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B13/12Layered products comprising a a layer of water-setting substance, e.g. concrete, plaster, asbestos cement, or like builders' material comprising such water setting substance as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/04Interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/12Interconnection of layers using interposed adhesives or interposed materials with bonding properties
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J175/00Adhesives based on polyureas or polyurethanes; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J175/04Polyurethanes
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04FFINISHING WORK ON BUILDINGS, e.g. STAIRS, FLOORS
    • E04F13/00Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings
    • E04F13/07Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor
    • E04F13/08Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements
    • E04F13/0864Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements composed of superposed elements which overlap each other and of which the flat outer surface includes an acute angle with the surface to cover
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04FFINISHING WORK ON BUILDINGS, e.g. STAIRS, FLOORS
    • E04F13/00Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings
    • E04F13/07Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor
    • E04F13/08Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements
    • E04F13/0889Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements characterised by the joints between neighbouring elements, e.g. with joint fillings or with tongue and groove connections
    • E04F13/0896Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements characterised by the joints between neighbouring elements, e.g. with joint fillings or with tongue and groove connections with adhesive joining strips
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04FFINISHING WORK ON BUILDINGS, e.g. STAIRS, FLOORS
    • E04F13/00Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings
    • E04F13/07Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor
    • E04F13/08Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements
    • E04F13/14Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements stone or stone-like materials, e.g. ceramics concrete; of glass or with an outer layer of stone or stone-like materials or glass
    • E04F13/141Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements stone or stone-like materials, e.g. ceramics concrete; of glass or with an outer layer of stone or stone-like materials or glass with an outer layer of concrete
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04FFINISHING WORK ON BUILDINGS, e.g. STAIRS, FLOORS
    • E04F13/00Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings
    • E04F13/07Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor
    • E04F13/08Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements
    • E04F13/14Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements stone or stone-like materials, e.g. ceramics concrete; of glass or with an outer layer of stone or stone-like materials or glass
    • E04F13/148Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements stone or stone-like materials, e.g. ceramics concrete; of glass or with an outer layer of stone or stone-like materials or glass with an outer layer of asbestos cement or the like
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E04BUILDING
    • E04FFINISHING WORK ON BUILDINGS, e.g. STAIRS, FLOORS
    • E04F13/00Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings
    • E04F13/07Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor
    • E04F13/08Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements
    • E04F13/16Coverings or linings, e.g. for walls or ceilings composed of covering or lining elements; Sub-structures therefor; Fastening means therefor composed of a plurality of similar covering or lining elements of fibres or chips, e.g. bonded with synthetic resins, or with an outer layer of fibres or chips
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2307/00Properties of the layers or laminate
    • B32B2307/50Properties of the layers or laminate having particular mechanical properties
    • B32B2307/542Shear strength
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2307/00Properties of the layers or laminate
    • B32B2307/50Properties of the layers or laminate having particular mechanical properties
    • B32B2307/558Impact strength, toughness
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2607/00Walls, panels
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G2170/00Compositions for adhesives
    • C08G2170/20Compositions for hot melt adhesives
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T428/00Stock material or miscellaneous articles
    • Y10T428/13Hollow or container type article [e.g., tube, vase, etc.]
    • Y10T428/131Glass, ceramic, or sintered, fused, fired, or calcined metal oxide or metal carbide containing [e.g., porcelain, brick, cement, etc.]
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T428/00Stock material or miscellaneous articles
    • Y10T428/24Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
    • Y10T428/24058Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.] including grain, strips, or filamentary elements in respective layers or components in angular relation
    • Y10T428/24124Fibers
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T428/00Stock material or miscellaneous articles
    • Y10T428/24Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
    • Y10T428/24777Edge feature
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T428/00Stock material or miscellaneous articles
    • Y10T428/249921Web or sheet containing structurally defined element or component
    • Y10T428/249924Noninterengaged fiber-containing paper-free web or sheet which is not of specified porosity
    • Y10T428/249932Fiber embedded in a layer derived from a water-settable material [e.g., cement, gypsum, etc.]

Definitions

  • This invention in one embodiment relates to a siding plank for attaching to the side of a wall, which provides for interlocking between siding planks and direct nailing through the fiber cement siding plank. More specifically, the invention in one embodiment relates to a siding plank formed by adhering two pieces of material together. Description of the Related Art
  • Siding materials have traditionally been either solid or thin resilient materials.
  • Vinyl and aluminum are two common examples of thin resilient siding materials.
  • Vinyl siding is a thin resilient material that is shaped into the desired profile in a plastic state after extrusion of a compounded hot melt.
  • Vinyl siding is commonly about 0.040 to 0.080 inches thick.
  • vinyl presents problems as a plank material because it has a high rate of thermal expansion, which is undesirable for a product exposed to a wide range of temperatures.
  • Aluminum siding is another example of a thin shaped product and typically has a thickness of about 0.010 to 0.030 inches.
  • the vinyl and aluminum profiles often have an installed shape similar to traditional solid wood siding, but often include an interlocking feature to assist with the ease of installation. The interlocking profiles are usually engaged in an upward motion against gravity.
  • Wood siding, hardboard and fiber cement siding are examples of commonly used solid siding materials. Wood tends to lack durability and is susceptible to burning and termite attack and is not sufficiently durable in moist environments, e.g., it rots upon prolonged exposure to water.
  • the siding shapes of solid materials are usually formed by saw cutting, machining or routing from a starting rectangular shape. A thick shadow-line or thick bottom edge of a solid siding is usually attained by starting with a solid rectangular shape of at least the thickness of the finished bottom edge of the siding. The solid siding is then machined or cut into the desired structure
  • the handleability of a siding plank is a combination of the weight, stiffness, and elasticity of the plank.
  • a siding plank should be self-supporting when balanced flat upon a support point, thin fiber cement siding planks manufactured by traditional methods can be brittle and break during manual transport. While thin fiber cement siding planks could be transported by handling the edges of the planks, this slows the installation process. Therefore, what is needed is a way to improve the handleability of thin fiber cement planks.
  • Fiber cement Resistance to the effects of water and biological attack, low density, and good dimensional stability make fiber cement useful in residential and commercial building applications.
  • the tensile strength of fiber cement is low relative to other building materials such as steel, aluminum, wood, and some engineered plastics.
  • the range of application for fiber cement products could be greatly extended if fiber cement articles could be reinforced in key areas where additional tensile or impact strength is required for a specific application. What is need is a way to provide localized reinforcement to fiber cement articles.
  • a siding plank for creating a deep shadow line is provided, which is comprised of a main plank section and a second piece adhered to the main plank section, wherein the second piece is adhered along a portion of the main plank.
  • the main plank is preferably composed of fiber cement
  • the second piece is preferably either fiber cement or plastic.
  • a fiber cement (FC) siding plank having an interlocking feature is provided that allows siding planks to be stacked in a manner that creates a uniform and deep shadow line and secures the planks against lateral forces by blind nailing instead of face nailing.
  • the interlocking feature also helps set the horizontal gauge of the exposed plank face and allows for leveling of the planks during installation.
  • the interlocking feature of the FC siding plank comprises matching lock and key cutouts on opposite ends of the plank.
  • the lock and key use gravity to help mate two fiber cement siding planks tightly and uniformly so as to maintain consistent gauge and overlap and create a uniform shadow line without face nailing.
  • the plank is secured from lateral forces by hidden nailing under the lap of the adjacent plank.
  • the FC siding plank is low-density and can be easily machined.
  • the siding plank may include a built-in fixing indicator that allows the installer to quickly determine the proper region to affix the nail.
  • the fixing indicator is formed on the FC siding plank using an extrusion process so that the fixing indicator is formed cost-effectively along with the FC siding plank.
  • the fixing indicator ensures proper placement of the fixing device within a predetermined nailing region.
  • the predetermined nailing region on the siding plank is preferably the overiap region with the adjacent plank so that the nail or other fastener can be hidden from view.
  • fixing voids or hollows can also be formed beneath the fixing indicator to relieve stress that can lead to break out and cracking of the product when nailed or fastened to wall framing.
  • the interlocking feature of a FC siding plank comprises an oversized "V" style lock and a key tip.
  • the lock can be separately attached to the FC plank or integrally formed as part of the plank.
  • the siding plank interlocks with an adjacent plank by locking the oversized "V" style lock into the key tip on an upper edge of the adjacent plank.
  • the lock maintains a constant gauge and overlap between the planks so as to create a uniform and thick shadow line.
  • the oversized "V" style lock design allows for non-uniform flatness of a framed wall and maintains a constant gauge of plank rows along the length of the siding and between rows of siding.
  • the plank is secured from lateral forces by hidden nailing under the lap of the plank.
  • the lock also comprises compressible regions, which allows the planks to be easily interlocked during installation and provides lateral compensation for non-planar mounting surfaces.
  • the compressible material can also act as a seal against wind and rain.
  • the interlocking feature of a siding plank comprises a square lock system.
  • the square lock system comprises a square lock, a butt piece, and an overiap guide.
  • the square lock system can be applied to a variety of siding planks, including but not limited to FC planks.
  • the square lock is configured to fit over an upper edge of an adjacent plank in a manner such that a small gap may be maintained between the lock and the upper edge of the adjacent plank to accommodate variable gauge height.
  • the square lock helps level the planks during installation and allows for small variations in the siding installed gauge while reducing lateral movement of the planks.
  • the square lock can be separately bonded to the siding plank or formed as an integral part of the FC siding plank.
  • the square lock has one or more dove tail grooves to enhance the bonding between the lock and the siding plank.
  • the square lock design preferably resists penetration of wind driven rain through the plane of the siding.
  • the siding plank of one preferred embodiment may also include an apparatus for reducing capillary action between adjacent overlapping planks.
  • the apparatus comprises a capillary break formed by adding to or indenting the material of the interlocking device of the siding plank assembly.
  • the capillary break is placed between adjacent siding planks to stop the rise of water in the plank overlap region and thus provide additional moisture protection to the exterior barrier wall and siding interior without leaving a gap that is attractive to insects.
  • a lightweight, two-piece FC siding plank that produces a uniform and thick shadow line when stacked with other planks.
  • the two-piece FC siding plank generally comprises a main plank section and a FC butt piece that is bonded to the main plank section and extends partially over a back surface of the main plank section.
  • the butt end piece reinforces the main plank section to increase the overall rigidity of the plank.
  • the thickness of the butt piece also helps to create a deeper shadow line on adjacent planks.
  • the butt piece is separately bonded to the main plank section so that the enhanced shadow line is created without having to machine a single rectangular FC material to form the equivalent structure.
  • the adhesive used to bond the two pieces together can be polymeric, cementitious, organic or inorganic or a combination thereof such as polymer modified cement.
  • the adhesive may also have fiber added to increase the toughness of the adhesive joint.
  • the main plank section is bonded to the butt piece using a fast setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane adhesive.
  • the polymeric adhesive establishes a very quick bond which enables a machining operation to follow the bonding operation in a single manufacturing line rather than having to wait for the adhesive to set and then machine in a separate operation.
  • the main plank is adhered to the butt piece using a cementitious adhesive that is compatible with fiber cement materials and thus can be bonded to the FC main plank while in a green state and co-cured with the FC material to form a durable bond.
  • a pressure roller system or a hand roller is used to bond the main siding plank to the butt piece.
  • a hydraulic press can be used to bond the two pieces if the siding plank or butt piece has uneven surface.
  • the two-piece FC siding plank can also be formed by extrusion in which a single piece of FC plank with an integrally formed butt piece is formed.
  • the main plank section and the butt piece can have hollow centers to further reduce the weight of the siding plank.
  • a two-piece FC siding plank includes an interlocking feature that mates two FC siding planks tightly and uniformly without requiring a visible nail or other fastener to fasten the overlapping region of the two planks.
  • the interlocking feature comprises a key formed on the main plank and a lock formed on the butt piece. The key fits into the lock and, with the help of gravity, interlocks adjacentiy mounted planks. The lock and key set the gauge of the exposed plank face without requiring frequent measuring.
  • an adhesive composition is provided that is used to bond cementitious materials, such as fiber cement planks.
  • the adhesive composition includes cement, silica, a thickener, and water, and may include organic or inorganic fibers.
  • the adhesive composition can be used to bond flat sheet, plank or profiled cementitious bound building products.
  • the adhesive can also be used to bond different density cementitious materials together to form a composite panel.
  • the adhesive is used to bond two fiber cement siding planks together.
  • the adhesive is applied to the fiber cement planks in a green state so that the FC and FC adhesive cure together.
  • the adhesive does not deteriorate under autoclave processing conditions and thus can be used to bond FC planks prior to autoclaving.
  • a siding plank having a spline that increases the handling, strength and stiffness of the siding plank and produces a uniform and thick shadow line.
  • the spline can be a shaped piece of one or more materials, and is preferably made of lightweight materials such as plastic, foamed plastic, metal or fiber reinforced plastic.
  • the spline is preferably attached to the main body of the siding plank to add function and/or aesthetics to the plank.
  • the spline improves the handleability and toughness of the siding plank. With the spline, the thickness of a medium density FC plank can be reduced without sacrificing handleability.
  • FC planks that are about % to 3/16 inch thick can still be handleable without breaking at 16 ft length when the spline is attached to the plank.
  • This provides a lightweight FC siding plank of increased length that is easier to handle and requires less material to manufacture.
  • the spline comprises a butt and a lock and is designed for use in combination with a FC plank.
  • the butt is thick so that a deep shadow line can be produced when the planks are stacked together.
  • the lock is an angled lock that is configured to help secure the plank to adjacent planks in the stack.
  • the spline is bonded to the to the FC plank with an adhesive and the spline has one or more dovetail grooves in the adhesive surface area to strengthen the bond between the spline and the plank.
  • the spline has an overiap guide that helps set the gauge of the exposed plank face.
  • the spline does not have to include a lock, an overiap guide or dovetail grooves.
  • a fiber cement article which may or may not be a siding lank, is provided having a reinforcing fixture adhered thereto.
  • the reinforcing fixture provides localized reinforcement to areas of the article that requires additional strength and/or support.
  • Figure 1 A shows an isometric view of one embodiment of a FC siding plank with a back surface visible.
  • Figure 1 B shows an isometric view of FC siding plank with a front surface visible.
  • Figure 2 shows an end view of FC siding plank.
  • Figure 3 shows a siding system of FC siding planks affixed to a mounting surface.
  • Figure 4 shows a method of installing a siding system according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 5 shows an isometric view of a section of an FC plank in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 6 shows an end view of an extrusion die used to form the plank of Figure 5.
  • Figure 7 shows a cross-sectional view of a siding plank system in accordance with the embodiment of Figure 5 affixed to a mounting surface.
  • Figure 8 shows an isometric view of a section of an FC plank in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 9A shows an isometric vertical view of a two-piece FC plank in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 9B shows an isometric horizontal view of the two-piece FC plank of Figure 9A.
  • Figure 10 shows a side view of a first end of a butt piece used to form the plank of Figure 9A.
  • Figure 11 A shows an isometric view of the two-piece plank of Figure 9A formed using a pressure roller system.
  • Figure 11B shows an end view of the two-piece plank and pressure roller system of Figure 11 A.
  • Figure 12 shows one method for making a two-piece plank.
  • Figure 13 shows another method for making a two-piece plank.
  • Figure 14A shows an isometric view of a two-piece plank formed using a hand roller.
  • Figure 14B shows an end view of the two-piece plank and hand roller of Figure 14A.
  • Figure 15 shows a method of making a two-piece plank assembly using an adhesive.
  • Figure 16 shows a method of making a cementitious adhesive for bonding FC materials.
  • Figures 17A and 17B show schematic views of a Hobart style low shear mixer containing adhesive formulation in accordance with the method of Figure 16.
  • Figure 18 shows a dewatering apparatus containing mesh screens and a metal plate in accordance with the method of Figure 16.
  • Figure 19 shows a high shear mixer containing an adhesive formulation in accordance with the method of Figure 16.
  • Figure 20A shows a partial perspective view of a two-piece FC plank assembly according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 20B shows a partial perspective view of a two-piece FC plank assembly rotated 90° from Figure 20A.
  • Figure 21 shows a side view of the plank assembly of Figure 20A.
  • Figure 22 shows a cross-sectional view of two installed plank assemblies of Figure 20A.
  • Figure 23 shows a method of the installing plank assemblies of Figure 20A.
  • Figure 24 shows an isometric view of another embodiment of the FC plank assembly.
  • Figure 25 shows a cross-section of the plank assembly of Figure 24.
  • Figure 26 shows a key tip on the FC plank assembly of Figure 24.
  • Figure 27 shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lock assembly on the FC plank assembly of Figure 24.
  • Figure 28 shows a cross-sectional view of the lock assembly of Figure 27 with approximate dimensions.
  • Figure 29 shows a cross-sectional view of lock assembly and key of two adjacent FC plank assemblies.
  • Figure 30 shows a cross-sectional view of a siding system made up of two-piece planks with oversized "V" style lock and compressible regions in accordance with Figure 24.
  • Figure 31 shows a method of making the plank of Figure 24 with an oversized "V" style lock and compressible regions.
  • Figures 32A and 32B show alternate cross-sectional views of plank designs that could utilize first and second compressible regions.
  • Figure 33 shows an isometric view of a section of a siding plank assembly with a locking spline in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 34 shows an isometric view of the plank of Figure 33.
  • Figure 35 shows a cross-sectional view of the plank of Figure 33.
  • Figure 36 shows an isometric view of the locking spline of Figure 33.
  • Figure 37 shows a cross-section of the locking spline of Figure 33.
  • Figure 38 or end view shows an end view of the locking spline of Figure 33, with approximate dimensions.
  • Figure 39 shows a cross-sectional view of the siding plank assembly of Figure 33.
  • Figure 40 shows a cross-sectional view of an alternative siding plank assembly having a locking spline with a chamfer.
  • Figure 41 shows a cross-sectional view of the two-piece siding plank system of Figure 33 affixed to a mounting surface.
  • Figure 42A shows a cross-sectional view of a plastic spline having a capillary break and dovetail grooves.
  • Figure 42B shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of a surface of the spline of Figure 42A having dovetail grooves.
  • Figure 43A shows a cross-sectional view of the spline of Figure 42A bonded to a main plank.
  • Figure 43B shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of the bond between the spline and main plank of Figure 43A.
  • Figure 44A shows a cross-sectional view of a two-piece siding plank assembly in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 44B shows a cross-sectional view of the two-piece siding system of Figure 44A affixed to a mounting surface.
  • Figure 45A shows a cross-sectional view of the two-piece siding plank assembly in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 45B shows a cross-sectional view of the siding system of Figure 45A affixed to a mounting surface.
  • Figure 46 shows the method steps for making a two-piece plank assembly using an FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline.
  • Figure 47 shows an isometric view of a section of a siding plank assembly in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 48 shows an isometric view of the plank of Figure 47.
  • Figure 49A shows a cross-sectional view of the plank of Figure 48.
  • Figure 49B shows a side view of the key tip of Figure 49A.
  • Figure 50 shows an isometric view of the locking spline of Figure 47.
  • Figure 51 shows a cross-sectional view of the locking spline of Figure 50.
  • Figure 52 shows an end view of the locking spline of Figure 50 with approximate dimensions.
  • Figure 53 shows a cross-section of the siding plank assembly of Figure 47.
  • Figure 54 shows a cross-sectional view of an alternative siding plank assembly with a chamfer.
  • Figure 55 shows a cross-sectional view of the two-piece siding plank system of Figure 47 affixed to a mounting surface.
  • Figure 56 shows a method for making a two-piece plank assembly using an FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline.
  • Figure 57 shows an isometric view of a section of a siding plank assembly in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 58 shows an isometric view of the plastic spline with a capillary break of Figure 57.
  • Figure 59 shows a cross-sectional view of the spline of Figure 58.
  • Figure 60 shows an end view of the spline of Figure 58 with approximate dimensions.
  • Figure 61 shows a cross-sectional view of a two-piece siding plank system showing adjacent siding plank assemblies formed in accordance with Figure 57.
  • Figure 62 shows an isometric view of an alternative embodiment of plastic spline with a capillary break.
  • Figure 63 shows a cross-sectional view of the spline of Figure 62.
  • Figure 64 shows an end view of the spline of Figure 62.
  • Figure 65 shows a cross-sectional view of a two-piece siding plank system showing adjacent siding planks formed using the spline of Figure 62.
  • Figure 66 shows a cross-sectional view of a reinforced fiber cement article.
  • Figure 67 shows a front perspective view of a reinforced fiber cement plank with a nailing skirt.
  • Figure 68 shows a rear perspective view of a reinforced fiber cement plank with an extruded polymer reinforcing strip.
  • Figure 69 shows a rear perspective view of a multi-lap fiber cement plank.
  • Figure 70 shows a method of making a reinforced fiber cement article. Detailed Description of the Preferred Embodiments
  • Certain preferred embodiments of the invention generally relate to lightweight siding plank assemblies that are structured to secure the siding planks against lateral forces without face nailing and to create a uniform and deep shadow line.
  • the shape of the plank is achieved by adding a second material to a base plank to add function and/or aesthetics, such as a thick bottom edge and/or interlock.
  • FC fiber cement
  • One siding design which uses a lock system, allows planks to be locked into one another without requiring extensive measurement to maintain gauge (the visible vertical distance between planks) and overlap (the vertical distance the plank overhangs the plank below) during installation.
  • gauge the visible vertical distance between planks
  • overlap the vertical distance the plank overhangs the plank below
  • FC siding planks will bring great value to the siding plank market.
  • an alignment feature or fixing indicator described below, adds value to FC siding planks by facilitating the installation process.
  • the appearance of nailable extruded products on the market has brought with it the need to provide nailing positions on the product to ensure proper and speedy installation. Accordingly, there is a sound business motivation to find a cost efficient way to add features such as affixing indicators to FC siding planks.
  • affixing indicators to FC siding planks.
  • a stackable siding plank that secures the bottom edge from lateral forces and allows for hidden nailing under the lap of the siding planks, as described below.
  • At least one embodiment relates to a low density plank with locking features and methods of installing the same.
  • the siding plank is manufactured using a process, which includes but is not limited to the Hatschek process as described in U.S. Patent No. 6,346,146, the entirety of which is hereby inco ⁇ orated by reference, to make low-density FC materials.
  • Low density fiber cement typically has a density ranging from about 0.7 to 1.2 g/cm 3
  • medium density typically has a density of about 1.3 to 1.5 g/cm 3 .
  • This embodiment includes locking features to allow siding planks to be interlocked when installed on a mounting surface (e.g., an exterior wall) as siding.
  • FIG 1 A and Figure 1 B show two isometric views of a siding plank 1100.
  • siding plank 1100 includes a back surface 1110, an end surface 1115, a key 1130, and a lock 1140.
  • siding plank 1100 further includes a front surface 1120.
  • Table 1 shows preferred ranges of siding plank dimensions for this embodiment: Table 1. Preferred range of siding plank dimensions
  • FIG. 2 shows an end view of siding plank 1100 that further describes key 1130 and lock 1140.
  • key 1130 further includes a key tip 1132 and makes an angle 1135 with a vertical plane.
  • the key tip preferably forms a tier indented in the front surface of the plank.
  • Lock 1140 makes an angle 1145 ( ⁇ ) with a vertical plane.
  • Angle 1135 ( ⁇ ) ranges in one embodiment from about 85 degrees to 30 degrees, and is preferably about 45 degrees.
  • Angle 1145 preferably is approximately equal to angle 1135.
  • a commercially available spindle molder (not shown) is used in one embodiment to machine key 1130 and lock 1140 into siding plank 1100.
  • a spindle molder is similar to woodcutting equipment; however, it is equipped with polycrystalline diamond (PCD) blades for improved performance in cutting FC products.
  • PCD polycrystalline diamond
  • Conventional machining methods for shaping FC material are used to cut the siding plank.
  • the use of low density fiber cement is especially advantageous because it enables easy machining of the material and greater tool life.
  • End surface 1115 is rectangular prior to machining.
  • FIG. 3 shows a cross-sectional view of siding system 1500.
  • a first nail 1540 rigidly attaches a first siding plank 1510 to a mounting surface 1560, such that first nail 1540 is completely hidden by the overiap (called "blind nailing").
  • Mounting surface 1560 is typically a series of wall studs.
  • Key 1130 of first siding plank 1510 is inserted into lock or overiap region 1140 of second siding plank 1520.
  • a second nail 1550 rigidly attaches a second siding plank 1520 to mounting surface 1560.
  • the gap 1530 created between first siding plank 1510 and second siding plank 1520 should be of a size that is aesthetically pleasing.
  • First siding plank 1510 and second siding plank 1520 are substantially identical to siding plank 1100 shown in Figure 1A, Figure 1B, and Figure 2.
  • Figure 4 shows a method 1600 of installing siding planks onto a mounting surface to form a siding system, which involves:
  • First siding plank 1510 is placed against mounting surface 1560 as shown in Figure 3. First nail 1540 is driven into first siding plank 1510 near its upper edge to rigidly attach it to mounting surface 1560.
  • Second siding plank 1520 is placed against mounting surface 1560 above first siding plank 1510 such that lock 1140 of second siding plank 1520 is aligned with key 1130 of first siding plank 1510, as shown in Figure 3.
  • Second siding plank 1520 is lowered onto first siding plank 1510. As second siding plank 1520 is lowered (with the help of gravity) onto first siding plank 1510, key 1130 of first siding plank 1510 automatically engages and aligns lock 1140 of second siding plank 1520 into a locked position. In this locked position, key 1130 of first siding plank 1510 prevents second siding plank 1520 from moving under the influence of wind forces, and therefore prevents wind-induced damage. Further, the locked position fixes the gauge and overlap, and creates a uniform shadow line, as shown in Figure 3.
  • Second nail 1550 is driven into second siding plank 1520 near its upper edge to rigidly attach it to mounting surface 1560. The method is then repeated to cover the mounting surface to form a larger siding system.
  • the embodiment described above has several advantages over the prior art. For instance, it avoids face nailing. Because nails are often used to achieve a tight and uniform fit between two siding planks, it is aesthetically preferable to avoid face nailing because the nail head cannot be hidden when finished.
  • the siding plank assembly of this embodiment provides a way to mate two FC siding planks tightly and creates a uniform shadow line without requiring a face nail to fasten the two siding planks.
  • the embodiment uses gravity during installation to obtain a secure fit between the siding planks.
  • Conventional siding planks such as vinyl offer interiocking features that require an upward motion against the force of gravity to interlock two adjacent siding planks into place. A more natural downward motion, taking advantage of the force of gravity, facilitates installation.
  • the assembly of this embodiment uses gravity to help interlock the planks.
  • a further advantage of this embodiment is that it allows the nail or fastener to penetrate directly through the fiber cement plank, in contrast to conventional fiber cement siding planks that are adhered indirectly to a mounting surface. Direct fastening of the fiber cement plank can occur with the fastener penetrating through the plank to attach the plank to the mounting surface.
  • siding planks in the prior art are often subjected to wind forces that may separate the siding planks from their mounting surface.
  • the embodiment described above reduces the likelihood of damage caused by wind forces.
  • the "shadow line” is created by the thickness of a siding plank's bottom edge, which casts a shadow on the siding plank directly below it.
  • a uniform shadow line is aesthetically desirable, and is usually achieved by face nailing the siding planks.
  • the embodiment described above produces a uniform shadow line between two siding planks without requiring a face nail to fasten the siding planks.
  • a plank in another embodiment, has a fixing indicator and a fixing void or hollow beneath the fixing indicator. Described herein is a fiber cement product having a fixing indicator and a fixing void or hollow beneath the fixing indicator, and an apparatus for extruding an FC product having a fixing indicator. The result is an FC product that is easy to install and insures proper placement of the fixing device within a predetermined nailing region.
  • FIG. 5 shows an isometric view of the FC plank of a preferred embodiment.
  • Plank 10100 includes a plank front or outer surface 10110, a fixing indicator 10120 located in proximity to a plank first or upper edge 10130, a plank back or inner surface 10140, and an overlap region or locking region 10150 located in proximity to a plank second or lower edge 10160.
  • Plank 10100 is preferably a siding plank manufactured of FC using a conventional extrusion process.
  • Fixing indicator 10120 is a depression in plank outer surface 10110 formed by an extrusion die as shown in Figure 6.
  • overlap region 10150 is a depression in plank inner surface 10140 formed by the extrusion die shown in Figure 6.
  • Figure 6 is an end view of extrusion die 10200 of a preferred embodiment.
  • Extrusion die 10200 includes a die outlet 10210 having a die outlet upper surface 10220, a fixing indicator dimple 10230, located in proximity to a die outlet first edge 10240, a die outlet lower surface 10250, and an overiap region form 10260 located in proximity to a die outlet second edge 10270.
  • Extrusion die 10200 is a conventional extrusion die for use with FC mixtures.
  • die outlet 10210 is shaped to form plank 10100 of Figure 5 as follows: die outiet upper surface 10220 forms plank outer surface 10110; fixing indicator dimple 10230 forms fixing indicator 10120; die outlet first edge 10240 forms plank first edge 10130; die outlet lower surface 10250 forms plank inner surface 10140; overiap region form 10260 forms overlap region 10150; and die outlet second edge 10270 forms plank second edge 10160.
  • Fixing indicator dimple 10230 has a depth "d,” a width "w,” and is a distance "a” from die outlet first edge 10240.
  • the fixing indicator will comprise an embossed feature between 0.015 and 0.080 inches deep and more preferably between 0.035 and 0.055 inches deep.
  • FIG. 7 shows a siding plank system of a preferred embodiment.
  • Siding system 10300 includes planks 10100A and 10100B, a wall 10310, and a nail 10320.
  • plank assemblies 10100A and 10100B are fixedly connected to wall 10310 using nails (or screws, or staples).
  • Figure 7 shows nail 10320 positioned in fixing indicator 10120 of plank 10100A and driven through plank 10100A into wall 10310.
  • plank 10100B When installed, plank 10100B is positioned such that overlap region 10150 of plank 10100B covers nail 10320 and fixing indicator 10120 of plank 10100A.
  • the first or upper edge 10130 of the plank thus forms a key tip that encases the overlap or locking region 10150.
  • fixing indicator 10120 of a preferred embodiment insures that nail 10320 is not too close to the edge of plank 10100A, thereby preventing cracking or splitting of plank 10100A. Additionally, it can been seen that fixing indicator 10120 insures that nail 10320 is well within overiap region 10150 and is therefore not visible when installed.
  • FC product having a plurality of fixing indicators 10120 in various locations on the outer surface of plank 10100.
  • FC product having a groove on the inner surface of plank 10100 formed by extrusion similar to fixing indicator 10120 and used for gluing plank 10100 to wall 10310 of Figure 7.
  • the fixing indicator could be formed using a post-extrusion marking technique, such as using a manual embossing in combination with a conventional Hatschek manufacturing process.
  • a manual embossing roller could be used in combination with a conventional extrusion process positioned in proximity to die outlet 10210 of extrusion die 10200 of a preferred embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 another embodiment has fixing void 10421 optionally included below the line of the fixing indicator to relieve stress that can lead to break out and cracking of the top edge of the product when nailed or fastened to wall framing or sheathing.
  • the fixing void could be formed using mandrel in the extrusion formation process.
  • FIG 8 shows an isometric view of the FC plank of a preferred embodiment.
  • Plank 10400 is another example of an FC plank having a fixing indicator 10420.
  • Plank 10400 shows an example of an aesthetically pleasing pattern on the outer surface of plank 10400 formed by extrusion in similar fashion as fixing indicator 10420 and a fixing void or hollow 10421 below the line of the fixing indicator.
  • the siding plank assembly of this embodiment provides an inexpensive affixing indicator on siding planks which reduces damage to the planks at installation due to improper affixing. Furthermore, the installation time of an extruded FC product is also reduced. Additionally, the siding plank assembly provides an aesthetic appearance as it conceals the affixing by limiting the affixing region to the overlap area between adjacently stacked planks.
  • the fixing indicator could be formed using post-extrusion marking techniques such as, manual embossing, machining, ink jet or other printing, stamping, pressing, and painting techniques, which are all time-consuming and costly.
  • the fixing indicator can be employed in several, if not all, of the siding plank assemblies described herein.
  • the plank of Figure 5 similarly contains a lock in overlap region 10150 and a key tip for insertion into the lock at first edge 10130.
  • a fixing indicator can be placed similariy on the key 130 of Figure 2.
  • a two-piece FC plank and a method of making the same are provided. These two-piece planks can be used to form the various shapes described throughout this specification in order to provide a lock and key, hidden nailing, a deep shadow line, and other features described herein. Two methods for forming a two-piece FC plank are described below.
  • FIGS 9A and 9B show isometric views of a two-piece FC plank 2100.
  • Two-piece plank 2100 includes a main plank section 2140, a second piece or butt piece 2130, a first end 2120, and adhesive 2110.
  • Main plank section 2140 is preferably a medium-density FC and is typically about 1/4 inch thick, but may be as thin as about 3/16 inch or less or as thick as about 1/2 inch or more.
  • the width preferably ranges from about 5 to 12 inches, depending on the application.
  • the length preferably ranges between about 12 to 16 feet, depending on the application.
  • Main plank section 2140 may be manufactured with a smooth or textured surface. Further information regarding manufacture of main plank section 2140 may be found in Australian Patent No. AU 515151.
  • Main plank section 2140 has an upper surface 2140U, also considered to be the back surface.
  • Butt piece 2130 is preferably made from a medium-density FC material, and is typically about 5/16 inch thick, but may be as thin as about 1/4 inch or less, or as thick as about 5/8 inch or more.
  • the width of butt piece 2130 is typically about 1 1/2 inch, but may be as wide as about 2 inches or more, or as narrow as about 5/8 inch or less, depending on the application.
  • the length is typically the same as main plank section 2140 (about 12 to 16 feet), depending on the application.
  • Butt piece 230 has a lower surface 2130L, also considered the front surface.
  • the function of butt piece 2130 is to reinforce main plank section 2140, thereby increasing the overall rigidity of plank 2100.
  • a second function of butt piece 2130 is to provide thickness for an improved shadow line, a desired aesthetic quality.
  • Adhesive 2110 located between upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 and lower surface 2130L of butt piece 2130, in one embodiment is a fast setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane with a viscosity of about 10,000 to 100,000 CPS at application temperatures. Other embodiments for the adhesive 2110 are described below.
  • the application temperature for adhesive 2110 ranges from about 200° to 325°F.
  • the adhesion time ranges from about 3 to 5 seconds. The adhesion time is the time taken for the bond strength to develop after the adhesive is applied and nip pressing is performed.
  • adhesive 2110 is applied in beads on upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 along its length. This may be accomplished by using a Nordson hot-melt extrusion system.
  • the adhesive beads are preferably spaced apart by a small distance, such as about 1" or 1/2".
  • the preferred amount of adhesive is about 1 gram/foot/bead, though the amount may be as small as about 0.5 grams/foot/bead or as large as about 2 grams/foot/bead.
  • lower surface 2130L of butt piece 2130 is interfaced with upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 such that first end 2120 of butt piece 2130 faces the center of main plank section 2140 as shown in Figure 9A.
  • the arrangement of main plank section 2140 and butt piece 2130 forms two- piece plank 2100 having an upper surface 2100U and a lower surface 2100L.
  • the bottom surfaces of the main plank section 2140 and the butt piece 2130 are preferably flush.
  • first end 2120 of butt piece 2130 makes an angle theta ⁇ of about 15 degrees, but may range from about 0 degrees to 60 degrees, with the horizontal plane.
  • the function of the angled surface is to aid water drainage.
  • Figures 11A and 11B show isometric and end views, respectively, of a pressure roller system 2200 for squeezing main plank section 2140 to butt end 2130.
  • System 2200 includes a first roller 2210, and a second roller 2220.
  • First roller 2210 and second roller 2220 are preferably opposing 7-inch diameter steel rollers and are arranged parallel to and adjacent one another with a gap in between.
  • plank 2100 is fed through the gap between first roller 2210 and second roller 2220.
  • the gap between roller 2210 and 2220 is sized to engage plank 2100 with an interference fit.
  • first roller 2210 is in direct contact with upper surface 2100U of butt piece 2130
  • second roller 2220 is in direct contact with lower surface 2100L of plank 2140.
  • Plank 2100 is transported through roller system 2200 at approximately 50 feet/minute.
  • first roller 2210 and second roller 2220 compress plank 2100 at a pressure of approximately 750 lb/inch of roller width for approximately 3 to 5 seconds.
  • Figure 12 describes a method 2400 for making a two-piece medium density plank 2100, which involves: [0155] Melting adhesive 2410: Fast-setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane is melted in a hot- melt application system. One such system is commercially available from Nordson Corporation. Application temperatures range from about 200° to 325°F.
  • plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are viewed for flatness. If plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are determined to be flat, the process is continued to step 2430. If plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are determined to be wavy or uneven, refer to method 2500, as shown in Figure 13.
  • adhesive 2430 Typically about 1 gram/foot/bead, but may be as small as about 0.5 g or as large as about 2 g, of hot-melt adhesive is applied in beads spaced about !4" to 1" apart on upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 (see Figure 9A) using the Nordson Co ⁇ oration system extrusion nozzle.
  • Butt-piece 2130 is placed onto adhesive 2110, shown in Figure 9A and as described above.
  • step 2440 Maintaining pieces under pressure 2450: Immediately (preferably within 3 seconds) upon completion of step 2440, plank 2100 is passed through roller system 2200, which maintains the plank under pressure (about 750 lb/inch of roller width) preferably for a minimum of 3 seconds to allow adhesive 2110 time to cool and bond with main plank section 2140 and butt piece 2130. The squeezing of main plank section 2140 and butt end 2130 causes the beads of adhesive 2110 to spread out in a thin layer.
  • the method shown in Figure 12, is a process for maintaining pressure on plank 2100 when plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are both flat.
  • a further process was developed to bond surfaces that have variable flatness, shown in Figure 13.
  • Figure 13 describes another method 2500 for a making two-piece medium density plank 2100, which involve:
  • Melting adhesive 2510 Fast-setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane is melted in a hot- melt application system.
  • One such system is commercially available from Nordson Corporation.
  • Application temperature typically about 250°, but may range from about 200° to 325°F.
  • plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are viewed for flatness. If plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are determined to be flat, refer to method 2400, shown in Figure 12. If plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are determined to be wavy or uneven, continue process to step 2530.
  • adhesive 2530 Typically about 1 gram/foot/bead, but may be as small as about 0.5 g or as large as about 2 g, of hot-melt adhesive is applied in beads spaced about Vi to 1" apart (a minimum of 2 beads are preferably applied) on upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 (see Figure 9A) using the Nordson Co ⁇ oration system extrusion nozzle.
  • butt-piece 2130 is placed onto adhesive 2110, shown in Figure 9A and as described above.
  • Maintaining pieces underpressure 2550 Immediately (preferably within about 9 to 12 seconds) upon completion of step 2540, plank 2100 is placed in a conventional hydraulic plate press or continuous press (not shown), which maintains the plank 2100 under pressure (about 750 psi) for a minimum of about 4 seconds to allow adhesive 2110 time to cool and bond with main plank section 2140 and butt piece 2130. The squeezing of main plank section 2140 and butt end 2130 causes the beads of adhesive 2110 to spread out in a thin layer.
  • the two-pieces of FC material can be bonded quickly so that post- bonding processes can be initiated immediately. Furthermore, bonding two FC material members together is more cost-effective than machining a single rectangular FC section to form the equivalent structure.
  • the siding plank assembly creates an enhanced shadow line by virtue of the first end of the butt end extending partially over the upper surface of the main plank section and provides a traditional cedar look with a thick butt edge.
  • the butt end piece also results in increased rigidity of the FC panel product so that it can be easily handled and installed.
  • a cementitious adhesive mixture is located between upper surface 2140U of plank 2140 and lower surface 2130L of butt piece 2130, as shown in Figures 9A and 9B.
  • adhesive is applied to either upper surface 2140U of plank 2140 or lower surface 2130L of butt piece 2130 along its length.
  • the thickness of applied adhesive 2110 is dependant upon the uniformity of textured surfaces 2130L and 2140U, typically in an amount that covers surfaces 2130L or 2140U, but preferably does not exceed about 1/8 inch.
  • Figures 14A and 14B show plank assembly 3100, and include a hand roller 3210 and an interleaver 3150.
  • Interieaver 3150 is a cured FC material used to support plank assembly and is in physical contact with lower surface 3140L of the plank.
  • hand roller 3210 is in functional contact with upper surface 3130U of butt piece 3130.
  • Hand roller 3210 is rolled along the length of plank assembly and is used to apply pressure to upper surface 3130U of butt piece 3130 while adhesive 3110 bonds plank 3140 and butt piece 3130 together.
  • Figure 15 illustrates the process for making a two-piece medium density plank assembly with the cementitious adhesive, described below. The method involves:
  • Adhesive 3110 is applied to upper surface 3140U of plank 3140, shown in Figure 14A, 14B.
  • Interfacing butt piece with plank 3320 Lower surface 3130L of butt-piece 3130 is interfaced with upper surface 3140U of plank 3140, shown in Figure 14A and 14B
  • Hand roller 3210 is rolled over the length of surface 3130U of plank assembly 3100 in a direction normal to the upper 3130U and lower 3140L surfaces, shown in Figures 14A and 14B, to force contact of adhesive with fiber cement pieces, and provide adhesion between butt piece 3130 and plank 3140.
  • Pre-curing adhesive 3340 Plank assembly is air dried typically for about 12 hours, but may be as long as about 24 hours or more, or as short as about 8 hours or less.
  • Autoclaving plank assembly 3350 Plank assembly is autoclaved at a temperature between about 350° to 400°F at about 120 to 145 psi for a period of approximately 8 hours.
  • Trimming Plank Assembly 3360 Overflow of cementitious adhesive 3110 is trimmed from cured and autoclaved plank assembly.
  • one aspect of the present invention provides a composition of matter for, and method of making a cementitious adhesive for bonding materials, preferably FC materials, and more preferably medium density FC materials.
  • the adhesive ingredients preferably include cement, silica, thickener, and water, and may include organic fibers or inorganic fibers.
  • the adhesive formulation can be used to bond FC materials prior to autoclaving.
  • a preferred adhesive is able to withstand autoclave temperatures and is compatible with FC materials.
  • Most conventional polymeric adhesives and polymer- modified adhesives melt, bum, or degrade when exposed to temperatures in excess of approximately 375 degrees F.
  • FC materials are dried in an autoclave that can reach approximately 400 degrees F. Therefore, conventional polymeric adhesives cannot be used to bond FC materials prior to autoclaving.
  • a preferred adhesive selected for use on FC materials should be compatible and as similar in composition as possible to the materials being bonded. This ensures that the system as a whole will respond to environmental factors in a similar manner within each component (environmental factors include temperature fluctuations, acid rain impacts, humidity, and wet-dry cycles). The adhesive and the FC materials will age similariy and thus will not weaken the system.
  • the adhesive composition of this embodiment can withstand curing temperatures in an autoclave and is compatible with the FC material to be bonded. Furthermore, the adhesive composition is less costly, more readily available, and more environmentally friendly compared with polymeric or polymer-modified adhesives. Unlike other adhesives, the adhesive composition also does not degrade under alkaline or moist conditions.
  • the cement, silica, and thickener are all added to the adhesive mix in powdered form, where the particle size for each ingredient may measure up to about 200 microns.
  • the cement may be present in the formulation in an amount between about 10 and 90 wt %
  • the silica may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 90 wt %
  • the thickener may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 2 wt %.
  • Water may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 90 wt %.
  • the organic fiber in the formulation may be in the form of cellulose fiber (where the fiber may be bleached pulp), and may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 5 wt %.
  • the inorganic fiber in the formulation may be in the form of Wollastonite, and may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 30 wt %. Both forms of fiber (organic and inorganic) may measure up to about 3 mm in length.
  • Table 2 shows three exemplifying formulations of cementitious adhesive.
  • Each formulation contains cement to form the body of the bond, and fine-ground silica to react and bind with cement when autoclaved.
  • the silica also acts as a filler/aggregate that lowers the cost of the matrix, without significantly reducing performance.
  • Thickener slows the water being drawn from the slurry (adhesive) into the fiber cement.
  • the presence of thickener ensures that the cementitious adhesive remains "tacky" during the bonding process of the fiber cement surfaces, ensures that the adhesive fills the gap between the pieces to be bonded, and "wets out” the second surface, which is necessary to develop a good cementitious bond.
  • the thickener also slows/reduces settling in the slurry and prolongs "open time” to add viscosity to the wet adhesive.
  • Formulation 1 and Formulation 3 additionally contain fiber to increase the bond strength. Both organic and inorganic fibers perform similarly in the formulation; however, organic fiber requires preparation for use, and inorganic fiber tends to be more costly to purchase than organic fiber. Although fiber adds strength to the adhesive formulation, it can also clog some applicators during use. To address this issue, Formulation 2 contains no fiber. Water is added as a necessary reactant for the cement in forming the hydrated cementitious bond. Water also provides the mixture "viscosity" necessary to mix the adhesive, to disperse fibers and solids through the mixture, and to apply the adhesive.
  • Figure 16 shows a method 4100 of making cementitious adhesive for bonding medium- density FC materials that includes:
  • Step 4110 Does adhesive formula contain fiber? In this step, method 4100 proceeds to step 4112 if the formulation being made contains fibers. Otherwise, method 4100 proceeds to step 4115.
  • Step 4112 Does adhesive formula contain organic fiber?
  • method 4100 proceeds to step 4130 if the formulation being made contains organic fibers. Otherwise, the formulation is presumed to contain inorganic fibers and method 4100 proceeds to step 4120.
  • Step 4115 Mixing silica, cement and water.
  • method 4100 adds the powdered silica to water to produce a 50 wt % silica slurry, and then transfers the silica slurry to a mixer (such as a Hobart mixer).
  • a mixer such as a Hobart mixer.
  • Method 4100 adds powdered cement and water to bring the percent by weight of solids to approximately about 68% to 70% (approximately about 430 to 470 milliliters total water per kilogram of solids), and then mixes the adhesive formulation for about five minutes to attain homogeneity in the mixture.
  • An example of a Hobart mixer is shown in Figure 17. Method 4100 then proceeds to step 4140.
  • FIG 17 is a schematic of Hobart style low shear mixer 4200 containing an adhesive fo ⁇ nulation.
  • Both views A and B include a Hobart mixing bowl 4210 and an adhesive formulation 4240.
  • a ribbon blade 4220 blends adhesive formulation 4240
  • a whisk blade 4230 blends adhesive formulation 4240. Either blade may be used to obtain similar results.
  • Step 4120 Mixing silica, inorganic fiber, cement, and water.
  • method 4100 adds the powdered silica to water to produce a 50 wt % silica slurry, and then transfers the silica slurry to a mixer (such as a Hobart mixer, shown in Figure 17).
  • Method 4100 adds the powdered cement and water, adds extra water to bring the percent by weight of solids to approximately 67% to 68% (approximately 470 to 500 milliliters total water per kilogram of solids), and mixes the adhesive formulation for about five minutes. Method 4100 then proceeds to step 4140.
  • Step 4130 Dispersing organic fiber in water.
  • method 4100 adds the organic fiber, such as unbleached or bleached pulp.
  • the pulp is previously hydropulped, refined, and diluted with water to about 0.4% by weight.
  • Method 4100 mixes and disperses the organic fiber for approximately five minutes.
  • Step 4132 Mixing silica and cement.
  • method 4100 adds the silica and then the cement to the organic fiber, and mixes the mixture.
  • the preferable approach is to mix the ingredients of silica, cement, and fiber, then to blend the ingredients for five minutes in a mixer (such as a Hobart mixer, shown in Figure 17) to attain homogeneity in the mixture.
  • Step 4134 Dewatering mix (optional). Following step 4132, a dewatering apparatus 4300, shown in Figure 18, dewaters the mix to achieve a thin paint consistency as described below. Method 4100 then proceeds to step 4140.
  • FIG 18 is a schematic of a dewatering apparatus 4300, which includes a first side 4310, a second side 4320, a third side 4330, and a fourth side 4340.
  • each side of dewatering apparatus 4300 preferably has identical length, width, and height. In another embodiment, each side would measure approximately ten inches long and three inches high.
  • the sides are arranged such that first side 4310 and third side 4330 are parallel to each other, second side 4320 and fourth side 4340 are parallel to each other, and each side is joined to two other sides at 90 degree angles (e.g., first side 4310 is arranged at a 90 degree angle to second side 4320 and fourth side 4340), as shown in Figure 18.
  • Dewatering apparatus 4300 is designed to hold a perforated metal plate 4316, a coarse mesh screen 4314 and a fine mesh screen 4312.
  • Views A, B, and C in Figure 18 show plan views of screens 4312 and 4314, and plate 4316, respectively.
  • Fine mesh screen 4312 conforms to ASTM#325; coarse mesh screen 4314 conforms to ASTM#10; and plate 4316 is approximately 3/16" thick, and is perforated with round VA" diameter holes 4317, at a frequency of 9 holes per square inch.
  • Screens 4312 and 4314, and plate 4316 may be made of metal or other comparable materials to provide similar functionality.
  • the adhesive formulation is poured into dewatering apparatus 4300.
  • a set of mesh screens and a metal plate (not shown) identical to 4312, 4314, and 4316 are stacked in reverse order on top of the set inside 4300 so that the screens and plates are parallel to each other, and the adhesive formulation is contained between the two sets. Downward pressure applied to the screens and plates dewaters the adhesive formulation. Water either exits through the bottom of dewatering apparatus 4300 or a vacuum apparatus (not shown) may optionally be used to remove pooled liquid from the top of the screens and plates.
  • Sfep 4140 Transferring to high shear mixer.
  • the adhesive formulation 4240 is added to a high shear mixer, as shown in Figure 19.
  • Figure 19 shows a high shear mixer 4400 containing an adhesive formulation 4240.
  • the adhesive formulation 4240 is added to a high shear mixing bowl 4410, where a high shear mixing blade 4420 revolves at a speed sufficient to create a vortex in the center of the mixing bowl (approximately 6000 RPM) and completely integrate all ingredients.
  • Step 4142 Adding thickener.
  • method 4100 adds thickener to high shear mixer 4400 as required to achieve a thick paint consistency.
  • Thickeners may be made of commercially available cellulose derivatives, polyurethane and polyacrylate, such as "Bermocell” (cellulose ether), "Ethocel"
  • ethyl cellulose polymer ethyl cellulose polymer
  • “Cellosize” hydroxy ethyl cellulose
  • “Natrosol” hydroxyl ethyl cellulose and derivatives
  • One preferred thickener is "Natrosol Plus D430", a cellulosic derivative (hydrophobically modified hydroxy ethyl cellulose).
  • the amount of thickener in one embodiment is nominally 0.5 wt %; however, more may be added to achieve the desired viscosity. A visual determination is sufficient to ascertain desired viscosity of the adhesive formulation.
  • other adhesives may be used to bond the FC materials. These include polymers or polymer-modified adhesives (called “thin-sets”) to bond the FC materials.
  • the one and two-piece FC planks described above advantageously enable the formation of a variety of different shapes that provide a variety of desired features to the plank.
  • Various designs are described below with respect to two-piece planks. However, it will be appreciated that similar shapes can be formed using one piece of material or other combinations of materials, such as described below.
  • a two-piece FC plank includes a butt piece having a lock such as described above.
  • plank assembly 5100 includes a plank 5140, a butt piece 5130, and adhesive 5110.
  • plank 5140 further includes a key 5160
  • butt piece 5130 further includes a lock 5150.
  • Figure 21 shows a side view of plank assembly 5100.
  • lock 5150 makes a lock angle 5285 with respect to horizontal line 5290.
  • Lock angle 5285 in one embodiment ranges from approximately 5 degrees to 60 degrees, more specifically about 45 degrees is preferred.
  • Key 5160 makes an angle of key angle 5275 in one embodiment with respect to horizontal line 5280.
  • Key angle 5275 ranges from approximately 5 degrees to 60 degrees, more specifically about 45 degrees is preferred, but in any case substantially equal to lock angle 5285.
  • Methods of cutting lock 5150 and key 5160 e.g. using saw blades, high speed molders, abrasive grinding tools, or a router fitted with cutting tools for FC materials are well known in the art.
  • Figure 22 shows a cross-sectional view of two installed plank assemblies.
  • a first nail 5340 rigidly attaches a first plank assembly 5300 to a mounting surface 5360.
  • Mounting surface 5360 is typically a wall stud.
  • a second nail 5350 rigidly attaches a second plank assembly 5310 to mounting surface 5360.
  • First plank assembly 5300 and second plank assembly 5310 are substantially identical to plank assembly 5100 previously described.
  • First plank assembly 5300 includes key 5320, which is inserted into lock 5330 of second plank assembly 5310.
  • Figure 23 shows a method of installing plank assemblies onto a mounting surface, including the following steps:
  • Step 5410 Mounting first plank assembly.
  • first plank assembly 5300 is placed against mounting surface 5360 as shown in Figure 22.
  • First nail 5340 is driven into first plank assembly 5300 to rigidly attach it to mounting surface 5360.
  • Step 5420 Aligning lock and key features.
  • second plank assembly 5310 is placed against mounting surface 5360 above first plank assembly 5300 such that lock 5330 of second plank assembly 5310 is aligned with key 5320 of first plank assembly 5300, as shown in Figure 22.
  • Step 5430 Lowering second plank assembly.
  • second plank assembly 5310 is lowered onto first plank assembly 5300.
  • key 5320 of first plank assembly 5300 automatically engages and aligns lock 5330 of second plank assembly 5310 into a locked position.
  • key 5320 of first plank assembly 5300 prevents second plank assembly 5310 from moving under the influence of wind forces, and therefore prevents wind-induced damage.
  • Step 5440 Mounting second plank assembly.
  • second nail 5350 is driven into second plank assembly 5310 to rigidly attach it to mounting surface 5360.
  • the siding plank assembly of this assembly can be used to mate two siding planks tightly and uniformly without requiring a visible nail fastening the overlapping region of the two planks to resist high wind loads. Furthermore, the siding plank assembly requires no starter strip at the base of the wall to provide the lap plank angle of the first installed plank. The lock and key also set the horizontal gauge of the exposed plank face without requiring frequent measuring.
  • a two-piece FC plank utilizes an oversized "V style lock system and added compressible material to provide added ease of installation and aesthetic value.
  • This embodiment also applies to any plank of similar shape that uses a locking mechanism in place of face nailing an outer plank bottom edge to an inner plank top edge, where the inner plank top edge has been nailed to a frame.
  • the "V" style lock allows planks to be locked into one another without requiring extensive measurement to maintain gauge (the visible vertical distance between planks) and overlap (the vertical distance the plank overhangs the plank below) during installation.
  • FIG. 24 shows an isometric view of a FC plank assembly 6100, which includes a plank body 6105, a lock assembly 6150, and an adhesive 6115.
  • Plank body 6105 is fixedly connected to lock assembly 6150 via an adhesive layer 6115, as shown in Figure 24.
  • Adhesive 6115 is preferably a polymeric hot-melt adhesive or a cementitious adhesive. The method of making a two-piece plank bonded with one of these two adhesives is described above. Table 3 shows preferred ranges of plank body 6105 dimensions for one embodiment:
  • Figure 25 shows a cross-section of plank assembly 6100 taken along line 25-25 shown in Figure 24. This view shows how lock front surface 6370 is bonded to plank back surface 6120 via adhesive 6115. The method used to bond lock front surface 6370 to plank back surface 6120 is the same as that described above.
  • Figure 26 shows a key 6200, part of plank assembly 6100, in greater detail. Key 6200 includes key tip 6210, which is a surface cut on a horizontal plane, parallel to horizontal line 6212, to "blunf the edge between plank front surface 6215 and plank top surface 6110. The length of key tip 6210 is Xk, as shown in Figure 26. Length Xk may vary in one embodiment from about 1/16" to 3/16". Plank top surface 6110 is cut at an angle ⁇ , relative to horizontal line 6212, which may range from about 5 degrees to 60 degrees.
  • Figure 27 shows the lock assembly 6150 in greater detail, including a lock inner angled surface 6315, where first compressible region 6310 is located, a lock inner surface 6325, where second compressible region 6320 is located, and a lock inner blunted surface 6330.
  • the length of lock inner blunted surface 6330 is X ⁇ , as shown in Figure 27. Length X ⁇ may range from about Xk + 1/16" to Xk + 1/8.”
  • First compressible region 6310 and second compressible region 6320 may be constructed of compressible materials, such as polyurethane elastomeric foam, rubber, rubber foam, or silicone rubber.
  • lock inner blunted surface 6330 is shown at an about 90-degree angle to lock front surface 6370.
  • the pu ⁇ ose of "blunting" the sha ⁇ cut where lock inner surface 6325 and lock inner angled surface 6315 meet is to provide a substantially flat surface rather than a sliding point for the plank assembly to be locked into the plank assembly above.
  • Lock inner blunted surface 6330 provides a more positive gauge for the plank assembly.
  • Figure 28 shows the approximate dimensions of lock assembly 6150. Preferred ranges for the labeled dimensions in Figure 27 and Figure 28 are shown below in Table 4.
  • Figure 29 illustrates how key 6200 of a first plank assembly 6510 fits into lock assembly 6150 of a second plank assembly 6520, and how the shape of lock assembly 6150 and key 6200 enhance the performance of the plank assembly.
  • Lock inner blunted surface 6330 and key tip 6210 are each cut at 90- degree angles to plank front surface 6215. This design allows the plank assemblies some lateral compensation for installation on non-planar walls.
  • lock assembly 6150 may shift laterally after being installed, the overlap is maintained because key tip 6210 and blunted surface 6330 do not shift vertically.
  • First compressible region 6310 and second compressible region 6320 have been added to the embodiment to seal lock assembly 6150 with key 6200, and to absorb lateral movement of plank assembly 6510 and 6520.
  • compressible regions 6310 and 6320 also increases the ease of installation because the plank assemblies can be locked into place without requiring excessive force.
  • the second plank assembly 6520 locked into the first plank assembly 6510 below it can move within the compressible distance between lock inner angled surface 6315 and the top of first compressible region 6310, and between lock inner surface 6325 and the top of second compressible region 6320.
  • FIG. 30 shows how a siding system 6400 appears after installation on a mounting surface 6410.
  • Mounting surface 6410 is typically made of a series of wall studs (not shown).
  • Plank assemblies 6400A, 6400B, 6400C, and 6400D are installed such that each plank assembly locks into the plank assembly below it.
  • nail 6420A fixes the top of plank assembly 6400A to mounting surface 6410.
  • Plank assembly 6400B is installed directly above it, such that the oversized "V" style lock secures plank assembly 6400B.
  • Nail 6420B then fixes the top of plank assembly 6400B to mounting surface 6410. This process is repeated with plank assembly 6400C, plank assembly 6400D, nail 6420C, and any additional plank assemblies and nails required to cover the mounting surface as desired.
  • Figure 31 shows a flow chart of a method 6500 of making a two-piece FC plank with an oversized "V" style lock and compressible regions, including the steps of:
  • Step 6510 Manufacturing plank.
  • a plank is preferably manufactured according to conventional Hatschek methods.
  • Step 6520 Bonding plank pieces.
  • plank body 6105 is bonded to lock assembly 6150 to form the plank assembly 6100 shown in Figure 24.
  • the method of bonding two pieces of FC material to form a two-piece plank either using a polymeric hot-melt adhesive or a cementitious adhesive is described above in greater detail. Some alternate embodiments may not require this step if they do not include bonded pieces.
  • Step 6530 Machining plank to fo ⁇ n key and lock.
  • planks are fabricated and machined to the requisite shape.
  • plank body 6105 is cut to form the plank top surface 6110 and plank bottom surface 6130.
  • plank top surface 6110 is cut (to form the key) at an angle of ⁇ , which ranges from about 5 degrees to 60 degrees, as shown in Figure 26.
  • Plank bottom surface 6130 is cut at an angle of ⁇ , which ranges from about 0 to 30 degrees, as shown in Figure 27.
  • the bonded piece is first cut at angle beta to form lock bottom surface 6360, as shown in Figure 27.
  • the remaining surfaces of lock assembly 6150 are cut to meet the specifications of length and angle listed in Table 4 above.
  • this step uses the same method as described above in making a two-piece plank with a lock and key design, including steps required to cut the plank.
  • Step 6540 Attaching compressible regions.
  • first compressible region 6310 and second compressible region 6320 are attached to lock assembly 6150.
  • Materials that may be used for compressible regions 6310 and 6320 include commercially available products such as polyurethane elastomeric foam, rubber, rubber foam, and silicone rubber.
  • the compressible regions are applied using conventional application methods, such as "Nordsons" FoamMelt ⁇ R > application equipment such as the Series 130, applied at about 250 degrees F to 350 degrees F.
  • First compressible region 6310 is applied to the length of the lock assembly 6150 along lock inner angled surface 6315
  • second compressible region 6320 is applied to the length of lock assembly 6150 along lock inner surface 6325, as shown in Figure 27.
  • the thickness y of compressible region 6310 and compressible region 6320 may range from about 1/32" to 1/8".
  • This particular embodiment describes a two-piece plank; however, the use of compressible regions may be applied to other plank designs as well.
  • planks that could utilize this feature are any of the above-described one or two piece planks and the below-described plank having a plastic spline.
  • An extruded plank could utilize this feature, as could any plank of similar shape that uses a locking mechanism in place of face nailing an outer plank bottom edge to an inner plank top edge, where the inner plank top edge has been nailed to a frame.
  • Exemplifying diagrams of two plank designs that could utilize the compressible regions are shown in Figure 32.
  • Figure 32A and 32B show plank designs that could utilize compressible regions to enhance the plank functionality.
  • Figure 32A shows extruded plank 6810 with first compressible region 6812A and second compressible region 6814A.
  • Figure 32B shows hollow plank 6820 with first hollow region 6815 and second hollow region 6817, where the hollow regions may be filled with foam or other material, or left open with no fill, and also shows first compressible region 6812B and second compressible region 6814B.
  • the design described above advantageously allows planks to be more easily installed on non-planar walls because they can be fit together without excessive force.
  • the compressible material also advantageously forms a capillary break, such as described below. Furthermore, the compressible material acts as a seal against wind and rain.
  • a plastic spline having a butt and lock is provided, which is designed for use in combination with a FC plank for a siding application.
  • the result is a two-piece FC plank assembly having an FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline having a butt and lock.
  • the siding assembly of these embodiments provide a lightweight siding assembly having a reduced amount of the FC material while maintaining an aesthetically pleasing shadow line when installed. They also provide for a low-cost siding assembly with increased stiffness and strength, which reduces breakage and improves handleability and ease of installation.
  • the siding assembly is also suitable for blind nailing and capable of high wind loads.
  • the spline can also be easily manufactured from plastic with fine details using an extrusion and or molding processes well known in the art.
  • the term plastic includes, but is not limited to, polymeric resins, copolymers and blends thereof with suitable flexural and tensile strength for the anticipated use and a heat deflection point well above the maximum normally experienced in the building environment (approximately 40°C to 60° C).
  • plastics could include but are not limited to: polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyolefin, polyamide (nylon), and ABS. These plastics can contain mineral fillers to reduce cost or weight and improve strength or toughness properties. Altematively, these plastics may also contain fibers to improve tensile strength.
  • the plastic spline can be manufactured using low grade or recycled plastic for additional cost savings without sacrificing desired attributes.
  • FIG 33 shows an isometric view of the siding plank assembly of one preferred embodiment.
  • Plank assembly 7400 includes a plank 7100 and a spline 7200.
  • Plank 7100 is preferably a siding plank manufactured of medium-density FC material using a well-known Hatschek process.
  • Spline 7200 is a "butt and lock" type spline manufactured of rigid plastic using a well-known extrusion process. Spline 7200 is aligned and is fixedly connected with an adhesive to plank 7100 (described in greater detail below).
  • FIG 34 shows an isometric view of the FC siding plank of a preferred embodiment.
  • Plank 7100 is a siding plank that includes a plank top surface 7105, and a plank back surface 7120.
  • Plank 7100 has a length "I”, a width "w", a height "h”, and a flat "t".
  • An example of plank 7100 dimensions include “I” between about 12 and 16 feet, “w” between about 3/16 and 1/2 inches, “h” between about 5 and 12 inches, and T between about 0 and 1/4 inches.
  • a cross-sectional diagram of plank 7100 is shown in Figure 35.
  • FIG 35 is a cross-sectional diagram of plank 7100 taken along line 35-35 of Figure 34. In this view, additional details of the plank 7100 are visible. Plank 7100 further includes a plank bottom surface 7110 and a plank front surface 7115. Also shown are plank top surface 7105 and plank back surface 7120. Plank top surface 7105 is set at an angle " ⁇ " to plank front surface 7115. Plank bottom surface 7110 is set at an angle " ⁇ " to plank front surface 7115. In one example, “ ⁇ ” is 45° and “ ⁇ ” is 84°. Angles " ⁇ " and “ ⁇ ” of plank 7100 are cut using angled water jet cutters during normal Hatschek manufacturing processing. Preferred dimensions and angles of plank 7100 are indicated in Table 5.
  • FIG. 36 shows an isometric view of the plastic locking spline of a preferred embodiment.
  • Spline 7200 includes a generally vertical plate 7205, a plate back surface 7210, a first flange 7215, a first flange top surface 7220, a second flange 7230, a third flange 7240, a third flange top surface 7245, and a fourth flange 7255.
  • Spline 7200 has a length "I", a width V, and a height "h”.
  • An example of spline 7200 dimensions include "I" between about 12 and 16 feet, V between about 3/8 and 3/4 inches, and "h" between about 1/2 and 2 inches.
  • a cross-sectional diagram of spline 7200 is shown in Figure 37.
  • FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional diagram of spline 7200 taken along line 37-37 of Figure 36. In this view, additional details of the spline 7200 are visible.
  • Spline 7200 further includes a first flange bottom surface 7225, a second flange front surface 7235, a third flange bottom surface 7250, and a fourth flange front surface 7260.
  • plate 7205 plate back surface 7210, first flange 7215, first flange top surface 7220, second flange 7230, third flange 7240, third flange top surface 7245, and fourth flange 7255.
  • a first edge of first flange 7215 is integrally connected at an angle to a first edge of elongated plate 7205.
  • a second edge of elongated plate 7205 is integrally connected at an angle along third flange 7240 between the first and second edges of third flange 7240.
  • a first edge of fourth flange 7260 is integrally connected to a second edge of third flange 7240 in parallel with plate 7205.
  • a first edge of second flange 7230 is integrally connected along first flange 7215 between the first and second edges of first flange 7215 in parallel with plate 7205.
  • Second flange 7230 and fourth flange 7260 are coplanar.
  • Figure 38 is an end view of spline 7200. Approximate dimensions and angles of a preferred embodiment of spline 7200 are indicated in Table 6.
  • FIG 39 is a cross-sectional diagram of plank assembly 7400 taken along line 39-39 of Figure 33. In this view, additional details of the plank assembly 7400 are visible. Plank assembly 7400 further includes a first adhesive layer 7410, a second adhesive layer 7420, and a third adhesive layer 7430. With continuing reference to Figure 39, the position of spline 7200 is shown in relation to plank 7100.
  • First flange top surface 7220 forms a landing adapted to support a bottom portion of the plank 7100 and is fixedly connected to plank bottom surface 7110 with first adhesive layer 7410.
  • Second flange front surface 7235, which forms part of the landing is fixedly connected to plank back surface 7120 with second adhesive layer 7420.
  • Fourth flange front surface 7260 is fixedly connected to plank back surface 7120 with third adhesive layer 7430.
  • Third adhesive layer 7430 is formed to direct water away from the joint.
  • Adhesive layer 7410, 7420 and 7430 is preferably a fast setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane such as H.B. Fuller 2570x or H.B. Fuller 9570 with a viscosity of about 10,000 to 100,000 CPS at application temperatures ranging from about 200° to 350°F.
  • the adhesion time ranges from about 3 to 5 seconds.
  • Figure 40 shows the same details as Figure 39 with the addition of a chamfer 7450.
  • Chamfer 7450 is placed at an angle " ⁇ " relative to plank front surface 7115 and may be flat or slightly rounded. Angle " ⁇ " is preferably in the range of about 30 to 60 degrees.
  • chamfer 7450 is accomplished by cutting or grinding plank 7100, first adhesive 7410 and spline 7200 such that the three elements are "blended".
  • Chamfer 7450 creates a smooth and aesthetically pleasing drip-edge for plank assembly 7400, suitable for painting.
  • first adhesive 7410 acts as a seal between plank 7100 and spline 7200, blocking wind and moisture.
  • FIG 41 shows a two-piece siding plank system of a preferred embodiment.
  • Siding system 7500 includes plank assemblies 7400A, 7400B, 7400C and 7400D, a wall 7510, and nails 7520A, 7520B, and 7520C.
  • plank assemblies 7400A, 7400B, 7400C, and 7400D are fixedly connected to wall 7510 using nails 7520A, 7520B, and 7520C, respectively (i.e. nails are driven through plank front surface 7115 of plank 7100 ( Figure 35) in proximity to plank top surface 7105).
  • Third flange bottom surface 7250 and plate back surface 7210 of plank assembly 7400B are positioned in contact with plank top surface 7105 and plank front surface 7115 of plank assembly 7400A, respectively.
  • plank assembly 7400C and 7400D are positioned in contact with plank assembly 7400B and 7400C, respectively.
  • Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly with a plastic spline and lock, wherein the plastic spline has one or more dove-tail grooves in the first flange top surface, second flange front surface, and fourth flange front surface, with the grooves running along the length of the surfaces, such as described below.
  • Figure 42A shows a cross-sectional view of spline 7200 with the above-mentioned dovetail grooves.
  • the exploded view in Figure 42B shows one or more dovetail grooves in first flange top surface 7220, second flange front surface 7235 and fourth flange front surface 7260 of spline 7200.
  • the dovetail groove 7220 provides a mechanical bond together with the adhesive bond to plank 7100 of plank assembly 7400 ( Figure 33). This is illustrated in Figures 43A and 43B.
  • Figure 43A shows a cross-sectional view of plank assembly 7400.
  • the exploded view in Figure 43B illustrates the interface of spline 7200, adhesive layer 7410, 7420 or 7430 and plank 7100.
  • Figure 43B shows adhesive layer 7410, 7420 or 7430 filling the dovetail grooves of spline 7200. Due to the dissimilar expansion attributes (temperature and moisture) between plank 7100 and spline 7200, stresses are induced in adhesive layers 7410, 7420 and 7430. In the event that the adhesive bond between the adhesive layers and the plastic spline fails due to these stresses, there is still a mechanical connection by means of the dovetail groove(s).
  • FIG. 44A Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly using a plastic spline without a lock, without an overiap guide (such as formed by the third flange 7240 of Figure 36), and with or without dovetail grooves, as shown in Figures 44A and 44B.
  • Figures 44A and 44B show a two- piece siding plank assembly 7600 and siding system 7700, respectively.
  • Plank 7610 is identical to plank 7100 of Figure 33 except that plank top surface 7105 (Figure 35) is not angled.
  • Spline 7620 is identical to spline 7200 of Figure 33 except that third flange 7240 ( Figure 36) is not extended to create the locking mechanism.
  • Siding system 7700 is assembled as described in Figure 44B except that the gauge of the plank must be measured during the installation process. This embodiment will create a thick butt (deep shadow line) but does not provide a natural overiap guide for installation.
  • FIG. 45A and 45B shows a two-piece siding plank assembly 7800 and siding system 7900, respectively.
  • Plank 7810 is identical to plank 7610 of Figure 44A.
  • Spline 7820 is similar to spline 7200 of Figure 33 except that fourth flange 7255 ( Figure 36) is eliminated and third flange 7240 ( Figure 36) is shortened and angled to about 90°.
  • Siding system 7900 is assembled as described in Figure 45B. This embodiment will create a thick butt (deep shadow line) and provide a natural overlap guide for easy installation, but will not handle high wind loads.
  • Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece plank for a siding application using a natural wood or engineered wood siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline with or without a lock.
  • Figure 46 shows a flow chart 7950 of the method for making a two-piece plank assembly using an FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline that involves:
  • Manufacturing plank 7960 A plank is formed according to conventional Hatschek methods. The plank top and bottom edges are cut to an angle using angled water jet cutters during the conventional Hatschek manufacturing process. The plank is pre-cured then autoclaved as per conventional methods. See Table 5 for preferred ranges of plank dimensions.
  • plank & spline 7970 Plank 7100 and plastic spline 7200 (manufactured according to Table 6) are pre-cut to a desired and equal length.
  • the surfaces of plastic spline 7200 are pre-treated in one of four ways to improve the adhesive bonding capabilities.
  • the four methods of pre-treating the surfaces of the plastic spline are:
  • Plank 7100 is bonded to plastic spline 7200 to form the plank assembly 7400 shown in Figure 33.
  • Plank 7100 is placed on a first conveyer traveling at a rate up to about 250 feet/minute and three beads of polymeric hot-melt adhesive are applied at a rate of about 1 gram/foot per bead along the length of the plank.
  • the beads are formed so as to align with first flange top surface 7220, second flange front surface 7235, and fourth flange front surface 7260 of spline 7200 ( Figure
  • Spline 7200 is placed on a second conveyer traveling at a rate up to 250 feet/minute.
  • the first and second conveyers feed plank 7100 and spline 7200, respectively, to a common destination such that the spline aligns to the plank, makes contact with the adhesive, and is fed into a "nip" machine.
  • the rollers of the nip machine are set to the desired overall plank assembly thickness and press plank 7100 and spline 7200 together.
  • the nip machine then feeds the plank assembly 7400 to a press where about 2 to 10 psi of pressure is applied for about 3 to 5 seconds.
  • Plank assembly 7400 is cut to a specified length and chamfer 7450 is applied ( Figure 40) using conventional cutting or grinding tools.
  • FIG 47 shows an isometric view of the siding plank assembly of another embodiment of the present invention that solves these problems.
  • Plank assembly 8400 includes a plank 8100 and a spline 8200.
  • Plank 8100 is preferably a siding plank manufactured of medium-density FC material using the well- known Hatschek process. Further information regarding the manufacture of plank 8100 may be found in Australian Patent No. AU 515151.
  • Spline 8200 is preferably a "butt and lock" type spline made of rigid plastic formed by extrusion. Spline 8200 is aligned and is fixedly connected with an adhesive to plank 8100 (described in greater detail below).
  • Figure 48 shows an isometric view of the FC siding plank of a preferred embodiment.
  • Plank 8100 is a siding plank that includes a plank back surface 8120, a plank key 8125, a plank key back surface 8135, and a nailing region 8145.
  • Plank 8100 has a length "I”, a width V, and a height “h.”
  • An example of plank 8100 dimensions include “I” between about 12 and 16 feet, V between about 3/16 and 1/2 inches, and "h” between about 5 and 12 inches.
  • a cross-sectional diagram of plank 8100 is shown in Figure 49.
  • FIG. 49A is a cross-sectional diagram of plank 8100 taken along line 4949 of Figure 48. In this view, additional details of the plank 8100 are visible. Plank 8100 further includes a plank top surface 8105, a plank bottom surface 8110, a plank front surface 8115, a plank key front surface 8130, and a bevel edge 8140. Also shown is plank back surface 8120, plank key 8125, plank key back surface 8135, and nailing region 8145. [0261] Plank top surface 8105 is set at an angle "d" to plank key front surface 8130. Angle "d" of plank 8100 is cut using angled water jet cutters during the normal Hatschek manufacturing process. Plank 8100 has a key depth "a,” a key height "b,” and a nailing region "c.”
  • Figure 49B is an exploded view of the plank top surface 8105 taken along line 49B-49B.
  • the plank top surface 8105 has a cant.
  • the cant has a depth "e” from the plank key back surface 8135 and a height "f.”
  • Preferred dimensions and angles of plank 8100 are indicated in Table 7.
  • FIG. 50 shows an isometric view of the plastic locking spline of a preferred embodiment.
  • Spline 8200 includes a plate 8205, a plate back surface 8210, a first flange 8215, a first flange top surface 8220, a second flange 8230, a third flange 8240, a fourth flange 8255, a fifth flange 8265, and a fifth flange back surface 8275.
  • Spline 8200 has a length "I,” a width "w,” and a height "h.”
  • FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional diagram of spline 8200 taken along line 51-51 of Figure 50. In this view, additional details of the spline 8200 are visible.
  • Spline 8200 further includes a plate front surface 8212, a first flange bottom surface 8225, a second flange front surface 8235, a third flange top surface 8245, a third flange bottom surface 8250, a fourth flange front surface 8260, and a fifth flange front surface 8270.
  • plate 8205 Also shown is plate 8205, plate back surface 8210, first flange 8215, first flange top surface 8220, second flange 8230, third flange 8240, fourth flange 8255, fifth flange 8265, and fifth flange back surface 8275. All elements are present along the entire length of spline 8200 as shown in Figure 50.
  • a first edge of first flange 8215 is integrally connected orthogonal or at an angle to a first edge of plate 8205 extending from plate front surface 8212.
  • a second edge of plate 8205 is integrally connected at an angle along third flange 8240 between the first and second edges of third flange 8240 extending from third flange bottom surface 8250.
  • a first edge of fourth flange 8260 is integrally connected to a first edge of third flange 8240 in parallel with plate 8205 extending from third flange bottom surface 8250.
  • a first edge of second flange 8230 is integrally connected orthogonal or at an angle along first flange 8215 between the first and second edges of first flange 8215 in parallel with plate 8205 extending from first flange top surface 8220.
  • Second flange 8230 and fourth flange 8260 are coplanar.
  • a first edge of fifth flange 8265 is integrally connected to a second edge of third flange 8240 in parallel with plate 8205 extending from third flange bottom surface 8250.
  • Figure 52 is an end view of spline 8200. Preferred dimensions and angles of spline 8200 are indicated in Table 8 below.
  • FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional diagram of plank assembly 8400 of Figure 47. In this view, additional details of the plank assembly 8400 are visible. Plank assembly 8400 further includes a first adhesive layer 8410, a second adhesive layer 8420, and a third adhesive layer 8430. With continuing reference to Figure 53, the position of spline 8200 is shown in relation to plank 8100. First flange top surface 8220 is fixedly connected to plank bottom surface 8110 with first adhesive layer 8410. Second flange front surface 8235 is fixedly connected to plank back surface 8120 with second adhesive layer 8420. Fourth flange front surface 8260 is fixedly connected to plank back surface 8120 with third adhesive layer 8430.
  • Adhesive layers 8410, 8420 and 8430 are preferably fast setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane such as H.B. Fuller 2570, H.B. Fuller 9570, or PURMELT R-382-22 with a viscosity of about 10,000 to 100,000 CPS at application temperatures ranging from about 200° to 350°F.
  • the adhesion time preferably ranges from about 3 to 5 seconds.
  • Figure 54 shows the same details as Figure 53 with the addition of a chamfer 8450.
  • Chamfer 8450 is placed at an angle " ⁇ " relative to plank front surface 8115 and may be flat or slightly rounded. Angle “ ⁇ " is in the range of about 15° to 85°. One example of angle " ⁇ " is about 45".
  • chamfer 8450 is accomplished by cutting or grinding plank 8100, first adhesive 8410 and spline 8200 such that the three elements are "blended".
  • Chamfer 8450 creates a smooth and aesthetically pleasing drip-edge for plank assembly 8400, suitable for painting.
  • first adhesive 8410 acts as a seal between plank 8100 and spline 8200, blocking wind and moisture.
  • FIG. 55 shows a two-piece siding plank system of a preferred embodiment.
  • Siding system 8500 includes a plank assembly 8400A and 8400B, a wall 8510, a wall outer surface 8515, and a nail 8520.
  • Plank assembly 8400A includes a plank 8100A and a spline (that is not shown).
  • Plank assembly 8400B includes a plank 8100B and a spline 8200B.
  • plank assembly 8400A is fixedly connected to wall 8510 by driving nail 8520 through plank front surface 8115 of plank 8100 (Figure 54) in nailing region 8145 located just below the area of plank key 8125 ( Figure 49A).
  • Plate back surface 8210 ( Figure 50) of spline 8200B is in contact with plank key front surface 8130 ( Figure 49A) of plank 8100A.
  • Fifth flange front surface 8270 ( Figure 51) of spline 8200B is in contact with plank key back surface 8135 ( Figure 48) of plank 8100A.
  • a small gap in the range of about 0.0 to 0.125 inches is present between fifth flange back surface 8275 (Figure 51) of spline 8200B and wall outer surface 8515.
  • Bevel edge 8140 ( Figure 49A) of each plank assembly allows for easy installation of one plank assembly to another.
  • plank assembly 8400A and 8400B of siding system 8500 is tightly fit, third flange bottom surface 8250 (Figure 51) of spline 8200B is in contact with plank top surface 8105 ( Figure 49A) of plank 8100A.
  • third flange bottom surface 8250 ( Figure 51) of spline 8200B is not in contact with plank top surface 8105 ( Figure 49A) of plank 8100A leaving a gap "y" in the range preferably of about 0.0 to 0.25 inches. Gap "y" allows easy leveling of the plank assemblies during installation.
  • the plastic spline of the preferred embodiment prevents lateral movement of plank assembly 8400 when installed.
  • Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly with a plastic spline and square lock, wherein the plastic spline has one or more dovetail grooves in the second plate top surface and third plate front surface, with the grooves running along the length of the surfaces as described above in greater detail.
  • Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly with a plastic spline and square lock, wherein the plastic spline has a capillary break in the first plate back surface running along the length of the surface as described below in greater detail.
  • siding plank assembly with a plastic spline and square lock
  • the siding plank is made of any suitable material including but not limited to wood, engineered wood, or composite wood plastic.
  • Another example of this embodiment is a one-piece molded or extruded siding plank having a similar cross-sectional shape and providing the same functions as the two-piece siding plank assembly of the first embodiment.
  • a one-piece siding plank is formed using conventional co- extrusion method or a variable composition fibrous cementitious structural product formed by co-extrusion.
  • FIG. 10 Another example of this embodiment is a one-piece siding plank having a similar cross- sectional shape and providing the same functions as the two-piece siding plank assembly of the previous embodiment.
  • a one-piece siding plank is formed using Applicant's skin and core technology, as described in pending U.S. Application Serial No. 09/973,844, filed October 9, 2001, the entirety of which is hereby inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • Figure 56 shows a method for making a two-piece plank assembly using a FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline, which involves:
  • Manufacturing plank 8960 A medium-density plank is prepared according to conventional Hatschek methods.
  • Plank key 8125 and nailing region 8145 of plank 8100 ( Figure 48) are formed by placing a sleeve of a profiled, offset thickness equal to key depth "a,” on the size roller of the Hatschek machine for a distance equal to key height "b" and nailing region "c.”
  • the FC green sheet rides on the sleeve creating the offset of plank key 8125 and nailing region 8145.
  • plank key 8125 and nailing region 8145 are formed by profiled press-rollers, where about 200 to 500 psi of pressure is applied to shape these regions.
  • the plank top and bottom edges are cut using angled water jet cutters during the conventional Hatschek manufacturing process.
  • the plank is pre-cured then autoclaved as per conventional methods. See Table 7 above for acceptable ranges of plank dimensions for this embodiment.
  • plank & spline 8970 Pre-treatment of plank & spline 8970: Plank 8100 and spline 8200 (manufactured as per Table 8) are pre-cut to a desired and equal length as shown in Figure 49A and 50, respectively.
  • the surfaces of plastic spline 8200 i.e. first flange top surface 8220, second flange front surface 8235, and fourth flange front surface 8260
  • the four methods of pre-treating the surfaces of the plastic spline are:
  • Plank 8100 is bonded to plastic spline 8200 to form the plank assembly 8400 shown in Figure 47.
  • Plank 8100 is placed on a first conveyer traveling at a rate up to 250 feet/minute and three beads of polymeric hot-melt adhesive with a viscosity of about 10,000 to 100,000 CPS at application temperatures ranging from about 200° to 350°F are applied at a rate of about 1 gram/foot per bead along the length of the plank.
  • the beads are formed so as to align with first flange top surface 8220, second flange front surface 8235, and fourth flange front surface 8260 of spline 8200 ( Figure 51).
  • the first and second conveyers feed plank 8100 and spline 8200, respectively, to a common destination such that the spline 8200 aligns to plank 8100, makes contact with the adhesive and is fed into a "nip" machine.
  • the rollers of the nip machine are set to the desired overall plank assembly thickness and press plank 8100 and spline 8200 together.
  • the nip machine then feeds the plank assembly 8400 to a press where about 10 to 100 psi of pressure is applied for about 3 to 5 seconds.
  • Plank assembly 8400 is cut to a specified length and chamfer 8450 is applied (Figure 54) using conventional cutting or grinding tools.
  • the siding plank assembly of this embodiment allows for small variations in the siding installed while reducing lateral movement (flapping) when subjected to wind.
  • the assembly also allows for leveling of the planks during installation and can be formed without machining the lock and key.
  • the locking system allows for easy installation and the plank top surface angle does not need to match the spline fourth plate angle.
  • an apparatus for reducing capillary action is provided in the overiap region between two medium-density FC or other siding assemblies when installed.
  • One example is a plastic spline having a capillary break formed by adding a lip along the length of the spline as described below.
  • Conventional exterior siding systems also include a "rain screen,” which is the combination of an airtight and watertight barrier placed over the exterior surface of the frame to be sided, combined with the siding.
  • the functional pu ⁇ ose of the siding is to keep moisture away from the rain screen inner barrier surface.
  • the siding of FC material, wood or vinyl rain screen is a series of horizontal "planks" which overiap at their upper edges to prevent wind and rain from penetrating to the interior of the rain screen.
  • the rain screen siding system if properly installed, is very effective at keeping the framing and insulation of the wall dry and airtight under all weather conditions.
  • the siding plank assembly of this embodiment reduces capillary action in the siding, thus providing additional moisture protection to the exterior barrier wall and siding interior while maintaining good resistance to wind driven moisture penetration. Furthermore, the assembly keeps the region that is nailed relatively dry, which increases the strength of fiber cement and therefore resistance to dislodgment of the planks by high winds.
  • Another way to solve the problem is to seal the space between the planks with caulk or other type of sealant. However, this adds complexity to the exterior wall system. Altematively, a gap or groove the length of the plank can be machined in the overlap area. However, this would create a weak point in the plank and would add a manufacturing process step.
  • FIG 57 shows an isometric view of the siding plank assembly comprising a two-piece plank having a plastic spline with an angled lock as described above.
  • Plank assembly 9400 includes a plank 9100 and a spline 9200.
  • Plank 9100 is preferably a siding plank manufactured of medium-density FC material using a well-known Hatschek process.
  • Spline 9200 is a "butt and lock" type spline manufactured of rigid plastic using a well-known extrusion process described above. Spline 9200 is aligned and is fixedly connected with an adhesive to plank 9100 as described above.
  • spline 9200 of this embodiment further includes a capillary break 9265 running along the length of spline 9200.
  • FIG. 58 shows an isometric view of the plastic spline with the capillary break of the preferred embodiment.
  • Spline 9200 includes a plate 9205, a plate back surface 9210, a first flange 9215, a second flange 9230, a third flange 9240, and a fourth flange 9255.
  • capillary break 9265 in the form of a lip running along the length of plate back surface 9210 along the lower edge.
  • Spline 9200 has a length "I”, a width V, and a height "h".
  • An example of spline 9200 dimensions include “I” between about 12 and 16 feet, “w” between about 3/8 and 3/4 inches, and “h” between about 1/2 and 2 inches.
  • a cross-sectional diagram and an end view of spline 9200 are shown in Figures 59 and 60, respectively.
  • FIG 59 is a cross-sectional diagram of spline 9200 taken along line 59-59 of Figure 58.
  • Spline 9200 further includes a third flange bottom surface 9250.
  • plate 9205 plate back surface 9210, first flange 9215, second flange 9230, third flange 9240, fourth flange 9255, and capillary break 9265.
  • a first edge of first flange 9215 is integrally connected at an angle to a first edge of elongated plate 9205.
  • a second edge of elongated plate 9205 is integrally connected at an angle along third flange 9240 between the first and second edges of third flange 9240.
  • a first edge of fourth flange 9255 is integrally connected to a second edge of third flange 9240 in parallel with plate 9205.
  • a first edge of second flange 9230 is integrally connected along first flange 9215 between the first and second edges of first flange 9215 in parallel with plate 9205.
  • Second flange 9230 and fourth flange 9255 are coplanar. Furthermore, material is added such that the first edge of first flange 9215 is extended and is not coplanar with plate back surface 9210, thus forming capillary break 9265.
  • Figure 60 is an end view of spline 9200 showing approximate dimensions. Preferred dimensions and angles of spline 9200 are indicated in Table 9 below. Table 9: Preferred Spline 9200 dimensions
  • FIG 61 shows a two-piece siding plank system as described above.
  • Siding system 9500 includes plank assemblies 9400A and 9400B.
  • Plank assembly 9400B is positioned in contact with plank assembly 9400A.
  • third flange bottom surface 9250 ( Figure 59) contacts the top of plank assembly 9400A and capillary break 9265 is in contact with plank front surface 9115 of plank assembly 9400A.
  • the result is a gap located above capillary break 9265 between plate back surface 9210 of plank assembly 9400B and plank front surface 9115 of plank assembly 9400A.
  • the resulting gap is equal to dimension "f of spline 9200 running along the length of siding system 9500.
  • Capillary break 9265 of this embodiment provides a gap equal to dimension T of spline 9200 preventing capillary action between plank assemblies 9400A and 9400B.
  • capillary break 9265 of a preferred embodiment maintains a wind barrier between plank assemblies 9400A and 9400B, as capillary break 9265 is in direct contact to plank front surface 9115, and third flange bottom surface 9250 ( Figure 59) contacts the top of plank assembly 9400A.
  • FIG. 62 Another example of this embodiment, shown in Figure 62, is a plastic spline having a capillary break formed by adding a groove along the length of the spline as described below. As this spline is extruded, the wall thickness is kept constant, and the capillary break is formed by a semicircular indentation in the back surface of the plate and a semicircular protrusion in the front surface of the plate.
  • FIG. 62 shows an isometric view of the plastic spline with capillary break of this embodiment.
  • Spline 9300 includes a plate 9305, a plate back surface 9310, a first flange 9315, a second flange 9330, a third flange 9340, and a fourth flange 9355. Also shown is capillary break 9365 in the form of a groove running along the length of plate back surface 9310.
  • Spline 9300 has a length "I”, a width "w", and a height "h”.
  • An example of spline 9300 dimensions include "I” between about 12 and 16 feet, "w” between about 3/8 and 3/4 inches, and "h” between about 1/2 and 2 inches.
  • FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional diagram of spline 9300 taken along line 63-63 of Figure 62.
  • Spline 9300 further includes a third flange bottom surface 9350 and a plate front surface 9370.
  • First edge of first flange 9315 is integrally connected at an angle to a first edge of elongated plate 9305.
  • a second edge of elongated plate 9305 is integrally connected at an angle along third flange 9340 between the first and second edges of third flange 9340.
  • a first edge of fourth flange 9360 is integrally connected to a second edge of third flange 9340 in parallel with plate 9305.
  • a first edge of second flange 9330 is integrally connected along first flange 9315 between the first and second edges of first flange 9315 in parallel with plate 9305.
  • Second flange 9330 and fourth flange 9360 are coplanar.
  • Figure 64 is an end view of spline 9300. Preferred dimensions and angles of spline 9300 are indicated in Table 10 below.
  • FIG. 65 shows a two-piece siding plank system of a preferred embodiment.
  • Siding system 9600 includes plank assemblies 9400C and 9400D.
  • Plank assembly 9400D is positioned in contact with plank assembly 9400C. More specifically, third flange bottom surface 9350 ( Figure 63) contacts the top of plank assembly 9400C and plate back surface 9310 ( Figure 63) is in contact with plank front surface 9115 ( Figure 61) of plank assembly 9400C.
  • the result is a gap created by the presence of capillary break 9365 between plate back surface 9310 of plank assembly 9400D and plank front surface 9115 of plank assembly 9400C.
  • the resulting gap running along the length of siding system 9600 has a depth substantially equal to dimension T of spline 9300 and a width substantially equal to dimension "g" of spline 9300.
  • Capillary break 9365 of this embodiment provides a gap equal to dimension T of spline 9300 preventing capillary action between plank assemblies 9400C and 9400D.
  • capillary break 9365 of the present invention maintains a wind barrier between plank assemblies 9400C and 9400D, as plate back surface 9310 is in direct contact to plank front surface 9115.
  • fiber cement articles having localized reinforcements are provided, which is designed in one embodiment for use in combination with a system of FC planks for siding applications.
  • the result is a locally reinforced FC plank assembly having fiber cement articles with localized reinforcements for improving the strength of individual FC siding planks.
  • the siding plank assembly of these embodiments provide a lightweight siding assembly having a reduced amount of FC material without compromising the strength of the plank.
  • the addition of localized reinforcement provides for a low-cost siding assembly with increased stiffness and strength, which reduces breakage and improves handleability and ease of installation.
  • the siding assembly is also suitable for blind nailing and capable of high wind loads.
  • Figure 66 shows a cross-sectional view of a reinforced fiber cement article 10000, which includes a fiber cement article 11000, a reinforcing fixture 13000, and a high-shear adhesive layer 12000 that is situated between fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000.
  • High-shear adhesive layer 12000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 can be applied to one or both faces of fiber cement article 11000.
  • Fiber cement article 11000 may be made in accordance with the methods described in Australian patent AU 515151, "Fiber Reinforced Cementitious Articles" and in U.S. Patent No. 6,346,146, the entirety of each of which is hereby inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • fiber cement articles manufactured by other means including but not limited to the Hatschek process, Bison process, filter pressing, flow-on process, Mazza process, Magnani process, roll-forming, or extrusion, can be used in this embodiment.
  • High-shear adhesive layer 12000 is preferably an adhesive with high-shear strength, good alkali resistance, durability in exterior cladding applications and quick setting capabilities.
  • the adhesive also preferably has sufficient working or "open” time to allow sufficient penetration into the fiber cement substrate.
  • the adhesive also preferably maintains its adhesive properties through exposure to many cycles of heat and cold and/or wet and dry.
  • One method of evaluating the suitability of such adhesive is to conduct a "peel test", well known in the art, in which the percent retention of peel strength is measured after several exposures to wet and dry and/or heat and cold.
  • durable high-shear strength adhesives are used, for instance: hot melt polyurethane adhesives such as Henckel Puremelt 243; hot melt polyamide adhesives such as Henckel - Micromelt 6239, 6238, and 6211; and hot melt modified ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) adhesives such as Reicholdt 2H850.
  • hot melt polyurethane adhesives such as Henckel Puremelt 243
  • hot melt polyamide adhesives such as Henckel - Micromelt 6239, 6238, and 6211
  • EVA hot melt modified ethylene vinyl acetate
  • Reinforcing fixture 13000 is preferably made from any common engineering material, preferably with a tensile strength substantially greater than that of fiber cement article 11000. More preferably, the reinforcing fixture is made of a non-rigid material. Preferred materials for reinforcing fixture 13000 including, but not limited to, metal foils, woven metal meshes, and expanded metal meshes of sufficient shape and dimension to be suitable for the application. Other materials of relatively high tensile strength, such as polymer films or woven and non-woven polymer fabric meshes may also be used.
  • both durable high-shear adhesive layer 12000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 are placed on one face of fiber cement article 110000 and centered along the length and width of fiber cement article 11000.
  • tensile stresses created by flexing fiber cement article 11000 are transferred to reinforcing fixture 13000 via high-shear adhesive layer 12000.
  • Reinforcing fixture 13000 can be applied to both faces of fiber cement article 11000 or can be applied to more than one area of fiber cement article 11000 with high-shear adhesive layer 12000 in order to accommodate stresses envisioned in the use and application of fiber cement article 11000.
  • Reinforcing fixture 13000 and durable high-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 may be applied to fiber cement shapes other than flat planks, including, but not limited to, panels, roofing shakes or shingles, tiles, slate, thick boards, and hollow or solid extruded profiles, in order to provide reinforcement in critical areas.
  • the reinforcing fixtures described herein are not limited to siding planks.
  • reinforcing fixture 13000 is illustrated in Figure 66 as a flat sheet, reinforcing fixture 13000 may also have any three-dimensional shape required to provide sufficient reinforcement to specific areas of fiber cement article 11000 when attached to fiber cement article 11000 with durable high- shear adhesive 12000.
  • the dimensions and shape of reinforcing fixture 13000 may be determined by analyzing the stresses in fiber cement article 11000 under specific conditions of load using any number of methods known to the art, including finite element analysis.
  • One means of evaluating the relative stiffness of reinforced fiber cement article 10000 is the "barrel test," which measures the ability of a plank to be self-supporting when carried parallel to the ground.
  • barrel test a plank is balanced flat upon the circumference of a barrel placed parallel to the ground. If the plank does not break after a predetermined amount of time, the amount of deflection from horizontal is measured in order to compare the relative stiffness of various plank designs and materials.
  • Table 11 illustrates the relative performance in the barrel test of fiber cement planks made according to the embodiments described herein. Table 11 Deflection and breaking behavior of FC planks in the barrel test
  • Figures 67, 68, and 69 below illustrate examples of fiber cement building products inco ⁇ orating reinforced fiber cement article 10000.
  • Figure 67 shows a front perspective view of a reinforced fiber cement plank with nailing skirt 20000, including fiber cement article 11000, high-shear adhesive layer 12000, and a metal or plastic nailing skirt 23000.
  • Nailing skirt 23000 functions as reinforcing fixture 13000 in this application and is preferably attached to fiber cement article 11000 in the manner described above with reference to reinforcing fixture 13000.
  • Nailing skirt 23000 serves as a nailing area for attaching fiber cement article 11000 to the exterior of a building and is of sufficient thickness to support fiber cement article 11000 when so attached. Nailing through nailing skirt 23000 reduces the amount of overiap required between siding planks. The stiffness of nailing skirt 23000 also provides resistance to wind uplift when the plank is blind nailed.
  • Figure 68 shows a rear perspective view of a reinforced fiber cement plank with extruded polymer reinforcing strip 30000, including fiber cement article 11000, high-shear adhesive layer 12000, and a three-dimensional reinforcing fixture 33000.
  • Three-dimensional reinforcing fixture 33000 functions as reinforcing fixture 13000 in this application and is attached to fiber cement article 11000 in the manner described above with reference to reinforcing fixture 13000.
  • Three-dimensional reinforcing fixture 33000 functions both to stiffen the plank and as a spacer between planks when several planks are installed on a wall. By providing the function of a spacer, the reinforcing fixture 33000 provides an aesthetically pleasing shadow line when several planks are installed on the wall.
  • Figure 69 shows a rear perspective view of a multi-lap fiber cement plank 40000, including two or more fiber cement articles 11000 joined in an overlapping fashion and bonded together with high-shear adhesive layer 12000.
  • Figure 70 shows a method 50000 for making a fiber cement article with a localized reinforcing fixture, which involves:
  • Designing reinforcing fixture 51000 Analyze the stresses on the fiber cement article in its intended use to determine the shape, dimension, and appropriate material for the reinforcing fixture. The analysis and design is performed using methods well known in the art, such as classical bending moment analysis or finite element analysis.
  • fabricating reinforcing fixture 52000 Fabricate the reinforcing fixture 13000 using well- known methods appropriate for the design and material generated in step 51000. For example, if reinforcing fixture 13000 were a metal foil of specific shape, a die would be fabricated using well-known methods to mechanically stamp the shape from a roll of aluminum foil of a specific thickness.
  • Applying adhesive to article surface 53000 Form a high-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 of a predetermined thickness by applying a predetermined amount of durable, high-shear strength adhesive to a predetermined location on the surface of fiber cement article 11000.
  • High-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 is preferably applied at a temperature in the range of about 200° F to 400° F such that the viscosity of the adhesive allows sufficient penetration into the fiber cement surface at the application temperature.
  • the durable, high-shear strength adhesive should ideally allow between about 30 and 60 seconds of working (open) time before setting.
  • the adhesive can be applied using any type of commonly used hot melt application equipment, such as a roll coater, curtain coater, or hot glue gun.
  • Applying adhesive to reinforcing fixture surface 54000 Form a high-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 of a predetermined thickness (when required to ensure adequate bonding between fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000) by applying a predetermined amount of durable, high- shear strength adhesive to a predetermined location on the surface of reinforcing fixture 13000.
  • the adhesive is preferably applied at a temperature in the range of about 200° F to 400° F such that the viscosity of the adhesive allows it to penetrate into fiber cement article 11000 at the application temperature.
  • the durable, high-shear strength adhesive should ideally allow between about 30 and 60 seconds of working (open) time before setting.
  • the adhesive can be applied using any type of commonly used hot melt application equipment, such as a roll coater, curtain coater, or hot glue gun.
  • Attaching reinforcing fixture to article surface 55000 Attach a reinforcing fixture 13000 to a fiber cement article 11000 manually or by mechanical means, such that the point of attachment is high- shear adhesive layer 12000 applied in steps 53000 and/or 54000.
  • Applying pressure to reinforcing fixture and article 56000 Apply a uniform pressure to fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 in order to bond reinforcing fixture 13000 to fiber cement article 11000.
  • pressure is applied by passing fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 simultaneously through the nip of a pressurized roller such that the roller uniformly exerts three pounds per linear inch (25 pounds across a 8.25 inch plank width).
  • Other mechanical means may be used to apply pressure to assemblies of more complicated shapes.
  • Setting adhesive 57000 Hold fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 in place for a predetermined amount of time, pressure, and temperature in order to permanently bond them together.
  • the pressure, time, and temperature required are dictated by the properties of the high-shear adhesive used and line speed of the manufacturing process.
  • hot-melt polyurethane adhesive is applied at 250° F, the components are assembled within 60 seconds, and the plank is instantaneously pressed using a pressurized nip roll.
  • Removing fiber cement article from press 58000 Remove finished reinforced fiber cement article 10000 from the press using manual or mechanical means.
  • the embodiments for localized reinforcement described above advantageously improve the handleability of thin fiber cement planks or other articles by allowing a thin, lightweight plank or article to have the same stiffness as a much thicker, denser plank or article.
  • localized reinforcements durably bonded to specific portions of a fiber cement article, the stiffness, bending strength, and /or impact strength of the fiber cement article may be improved, allowing such articles to be used in applications previously unsuitable for fiber cement due to its brittleness.
  • Fiber cement siding planks formed as described above are capable of handling high wind loads when blind nailed, and provide a way to minimize the amount of overlap between fiber cement planks while maintaining a secure attachment.
  • Articles made according to the methods described above also have greater resistance to adhesive failure after exposure to wet/dry cycles, attack by alkaline solutions, or soak/freeze/thaw cycling. Additionally, by using localized reinforcements durably bonded to specific portions of a fiber article, such articles may be designed for a given application using less fiber cement material and/or fiber cement material of a lower density. In the embodiment above using a foil-backed fiber cement planks, such planks are capable of reflecting heat from a building, which keeps the building cooler in hot weather.
  • the problem of providing localized reinforcement to fiber cement articles can be solved by embedding the reinforcing fixture within the fiber cement article while the fiber cement article is in the green or plastic state.
  • the reinforcing fixture should be chosen to withstand the high temperature of the curing process of the fiber cement article so as not to lose their effectiveness.
  • Certain preferred embodiments of the present invention provide efficient designs for lightweight fiber cement siding plank assemblies having the traditional deep shadow-line.
  • the deep shadow line is created without having to machine the siding plank or otherwise remove any siding plank material.
  • the siding plank is formed by adding material to a thinner starting base siding plank instead of removing material from a thick rectangular section as shown in prior art.
  • two pieces of FC material can be bonded solidly and quickly using the adhesive composition of the preferred embodiments. As such, thin and lightweight planks can be used as siding material that produces a thick shadow line.
  • the siding plank assembly of certain preferred embodiments provide interiocking features that allow the planks to be installed quickly with ease and maintain a constant gauge of plank rows along the length of the siding and between rows of sidings.
  • the siding plank assembly also provides the installation flexibility of variable gauge height.
  • the siding plank assemblies use gravity to help mate two planks tightly and uniformly without face nailing.
  • certain preferred embodiments of the present invention provide for improved handleability and strength of thin fiber cement planks by allowing a thin, lightweight plank to have the same stiffness as a much thinker, denser plank. This is preferably accomplished by reinforcing specific portions of a fiber cement article with reinforcing fixtures.
  • a locally reinforced article has the advantages of producing a low cost article that handles well during installation and under wind loads.
  • the reinforced article also provides a way to minimize the amount of overlap between fiber cement planks while maintaining a secure attachment as well as a way to reflect heat.

Abstract

In one embodiment, a siding plank assembly comprising an interlocking feature that allows the siding plank to be stacked with other siding planks in a manner such that a uniform and deep shadow line is created. The interlocking feature sets the gauge of the exposed plank face and allows for leveling of the plank during installation. The siding plank assembly comprises a main plank section securely bonded to a second piece that produces a deep shadow line. In preferred embodiments, the second piece may be a fiber cement butt piece or a plastic spline that is bonded to the main plank section. A lock structure may also be included on the fiber cement butt piece or plastic spline.

Description

TWO-PIECE SIDING PLANK, METHODS OF MAKING AND INSTALLING
Priority Information
[0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Number 60/281,195, filed April 3, 2001, the entirety of which is incoφorated by reference herein.
Background of the Invention Field of the Invention
[0002] This invention in one embodiment relates to a siding plank for attaching to the side of a wall, which provides for interlocking between siding planks and direct nailing through the fiber cement siding plank. More specifically, the invention in one embodiment relates to a siding plank formed by adhering two pieces of material together. Description of the Related Art
[0003] The market for fiber cement siding for new home construction and home refurbishing markets in the United States is presently strong, due in large part to favorable economic conditions and the durability of fiber cement.
[0004] Siding materials have traditionally been either solid or thin resilient materials. Vinyl and aluminum are two common examples of thin resilient siding materials. Vinyl siding is a thin resilient material that is shaped into the desired profile in a plastic state after extrusion of a compounded hot melt. Vinyl siding is commonly about 0.040 to 0.080 inches thick. However, vinyl presents problems as a plank material because it has a high rate of thermal expansion, which is undesirable for a product exposed to a wide range of temperatures. Aluminum siding is another example of a thin shaped product and typically has a thickness of about 0.010 to 0.030 inches. The vinyl and aluminum profiles often have an installed shape similar to traditional solid wood siding, but often include an interlocking feature to assist with the ease of installation. The interlocking profiles are usually engaged in an upward motion against gravity.
[0005] It is aesthetically pleasing for siding materials in the form of horizontal planks or laps to have a strong "shadow line" or perceived thickness such that individual planks can be discerned from a distance. This is evident from the design trends of thin vinyl or aluminum siding panels, which can be molded or extruded to give the appearance of thick, individual wood planks.
[0006] There are a number of different solid siding materials that are used in the construction and refurbishing industry. Wood siding, hardboard and fiber cement siding are examples of commonly used solid siding materials. Wood tends to lack durability and is susceptible to burning and termite attack and is not sufficiently durable in moist environments, e.g., it rots upon prolonged exposure to water. The siding shapes of solid materials are usually formed by saw cutting, machining or routing from a starting rectangular shape. A thick shadow-line or thick bottom edge of a solid siding is usually attained by starting with a solid rectangular shape of at least the thickness of the finished bottom edge of the siding. The solid siding is then machined or cut into the desired structure
[0007] While panels and planks made from wood, wood composites, and fiber-reinforced cementitious materials are inherently solid and thick, further increases in thickness of the fiber cement are not practical for reasons of material cost, weight and handling characteristics of long siding planks. Rather, an assembly that allows the use of less material while maintaining perceived thickness when installed would be beneficial. Thus, what is needed is a more efficient design of siding with a thick bottom edge to create the traditional deep shadow line with a more efficient use of material.
[0008] In addition, what is needed is a way to form a vertically-installed stackable siding plank that secures the bottom edge from lateral forces and has hidden nailing for improved aesthetics under the lap of the siding planks. In addition, what is needed is a stackable siding as described above with the exterior durability of fiber cement that is more easily machined than traditional medium density fiber cement. Furthermore, what is needed is a siding that installs with ease, maintains a constant gauge of plank rows along the length of the siding and between rows of siding and preferably resists penetration of wind driven rain through the plane of the siding.
[0009] The handleability of a siding plank is a combination of the weight, stiffness, and elasticity of the plank. Although a siding plank should be self-supporting when balanced flat upon a support point, thin fiber cement siding planks manufactured by traditional methods can be brittle and break during manual transport. While thin fiber cement siding planks could be transported by handling the edges of the planks, this slows the installation process. Therefore, what is needed is a way to improve the handleability of thin fiber cement planks.
[0010] Resistance to the effects of water and biological attack, low density, and good dimensional stability make fiber cement useful in residential and commercial building applications. However, the tensile strength of fiber cement is low relative to other building materials such as steel, aluminum, wood, and some engineered plastics. The range of application for fiber cement products could be greatly extended if fiber cement articles could be reinforced in key areas where additional tensile or impact strength is required for a specific application. What is need is a way to provide localized reinforcement to fiber cement articles.
[0011] Other desired attributes of a siding plank include increased installation flexibility of variable gauge height, as well as prevention of the rise of water between two surfaces in the plank overlap region. Thus, to create higher value building products for the siding market, new siding designs and functionality are needed.
Summary of the Invention
[0012] In one preferred embodiment of the present invention, a siding plank for creating a deep shadow line is provided, which is comprised of a main plank section and a second piece adhered to the main plank section, wherein the second piece is adhered along a portion of the main plank. Whereas the main plank is preferably composed of fiber cement, the second piece is preferably either fiber cement or plastic. [0013] A further brief description of other embodiments that may be used in conjunction with the foregoing embodiment is presented below.
[0014] In one aspect, a fiber cement (FC) siding plank having an interlocking feature is provided that allows siding planks to be stacked in a manner that creates a uniform and deep shadow line and secures the planks against lateral forces by blind nailing instead of face nailing. Preferably, the interlocking feature also helps set the horizontal gauge of the exposed plank face and allows for leveling of the planks during installation.
[0015] In one embodiment, the interlocking feature of the FC siding plank comprises matching lock and key cutouts on opposite ends of the plank. Preferably, the lock and key use gravity to help mate two fiber cement siding planks tightly and uniformly so as to maintain consistent gauge and overlap and create a uniform shadow line without face nailing. The plank is secured from lateral forces by hidden nailing under the lap of the adjacent plank. Preferably, the FC siding plank is low-density and can be easily machined.
[0016] Furthermore, the siding plank may include a built-in fixing indicator that allows the installer to quickly determine the proper region to affix the nail. Preferably, the fixing indicator is formed on the FC siding plank using an extrusion process so that the fixing indicator is formed cost-effectively along with the FC siding plank. The fixing indicator ensures proper placement of the fixing device within a predetermined nailing region. The predetermined nailing region on the siding plank is preferably the overiap region with the adjacent plank so that the nail or other fastener can be hidden from view. Moreover, fixing voids or hollows can also be formed beneath the fixing indicator to relieve stress that can lead to break out and cracking of the product when nailed or fastened to wall framing.
[0017] In another embodiment, the interlocking feature of a FC siding plank comprises an oversized "V" style lock and a key tip. The lock can be separately attached to the FC plank or integrally formed as part of the plank. Preferably, the siding plank interlocks with an adjacent plank by locking the oversized "V" style lock into the key tip on an upper edge of the adjacent plank. The lock maintains a constant gauge and overlap between the planks so as to create a uniform and thick shadow line. The oversized "V" style lock design allows for non-uniform flatness of a framed wall and maintains a constant gauge of plank rows along the length of the siding and between rows of siding. The plank is secured from lateral forces by hidden nailing under the lap of the plank. Preferably, the lock also comprises compressible regions, which allows the planks to be easily interlocked during installation and provides lateral compensation for non-planar mounting surfaces. The compressible material can also act as a seal against wind and rain.
[0018] In another embodiment, the interlocking feature of a siding plank comprises a square lock system. Preferably, the square lock system comprises a square lock, a butt piece, and an overiap guide.
It can be appreciated that the square lock system, as well as the other systems described herein, can be applied to a variety of siding planks, including but not limited to FC planks. Preferably, the square lock is configured to fit over an upper edge of an adjacent plank in a manner such that a small gap may be maintained between the lock and the upper edge of the adjacent plank to accommodate variable gauge height. The square lock helps level the planks during installation and allows for small variations in the siding installed gauge while reducing lateral movement of the planks. The square lock can be separately bonded to the siding plank or formed as an integral part of the FC siding plank. Preferably, the square lock has one or more dove tail grooves to enhance the bonding between the lock and the siding plank. The square lock design preferably resists penetration of wind driven rain through the plane of the siding.
[0019] Furthermore, the siding plank of one preferred embodiment may also include an apparatus for reducing capillary action between adjacent overlapping planks. Preferably, the apparatus comprises a capillary break formed by adding to or indenting the material of the interlocking device of the siding plank assembly. Preferably, the capillary break is placed between adjacent siding planks to stop the rise of water in the plank overlap region and thus provide additional moisture protection to the exterior barrier wall and siding interior without leaving a gap that is attractive to insects.
[0020] In another aspect, a lightweight, two-piece FC siding plank is provided that produces a uniform and thick shadow line when stacked with other planks. The two-piece FC siding plank generally comprises a main plank section and a FC butt piece that is bonded to the main plank section and extends partially over a back surface of the main plank section. The butt end piece reinforces the main plank section to increase the overall rigidity of the plank. The thickness of the butt piece also helps to create a deeper shadow line on adjacent planks. Preferably, the butt piece is separately bonded to the main plank section so that the enhanced shadow line is created without having to machine a single rectangular FC material to form the equivalent structure.
[0021] The adhesive used to bond the two pieces together can be polymeric, cementitious, organic or inorganic or a combination thereof such as polymer modified cement. The adhesive may also have fiber added to increase the toughness of the adhesive joint. In one embodiment, the main plank section is bonded to the butt piece using a fast setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane adhesive. Preferably, the polymeric adhesive establishes a very quick bond which enables a machining operation to follow the bonding operation in a single manufacturing line rather than having to wait for the adhesive to set and then machine in a separate operation.
[0022] In another embodiment, the main plank is adhered to the butt piece using a cementitious adhesive that is compatible with fiber cement materials and thus can be bonded to the FC main plank while in a green state and co-cured with the FC material to form a durable bond. Preferably, a pressure roller system or a hand roller is used to bond the main siding plank to the butt piece. A hydraulic press can be used to bond the two pieces if the siding plank or butt piece has uneven surface. Additionally, in other embodiments, the two-piece FC siding plank can also be formed by extrusion in which a single piece of FC plank with an integrally formed butt piece is formed. Furthermore, the main plank section and the butt piece can have hollow centers to further reduce the weight of the siding plank.
[0023] In another embodiment, a two-piece FC siding plank includes an interlocking feature that mates two FC siding planks tightly and uniformly without requiring a visible nail or other fastener to fasten the overlapping region of the two planks. Preferably, the interlocking feature comprises a key formed on the main plank and a lock formed on the butt piece. The key fits into the lock and, with the help of gravity, interlocks adjacentiy mounted planks. The lock and key set the gauge of the exposed plank face without requiring frequent measuring.
[0024] In another aspect, an adhesive composition is provided that is used to bond cementitious materials, such as fiber cement planks. Preferably, the adhesive composition includes cement, silica, a thickener, and water, and may include organic or inorganic fibers. The adhesive composition can be used to bond flat sheet, plank or profiled cementitious bound building products. The adhesive can also be used to bond different density cementitious materials together to form a composite panel. In one embodiment, the adhesive is used to bond two fiber cement siding planks together. Preferably, the adhesive is applied to the fiber cement planks in a green state so that the FC and FC adhesive cure together. Preferably, the adhesive does not deteriorate under autoclave processing conditions and thus can be used to bond FC planks prior to autoclaving.
[0025] In another aspect, a siding plank having a spline is provided that increases the handling, strength and stiffness of the siding plank and produces a uniform and thick shadow line. The spline can be a shaped piece of one or more materials, and is preferably made of lightweight materials such as plastic, foamed plastic, metal or fiber reinforced plastic. The spline is preferably attached to the main body of the siding plank to add function and/or aesthetics to the plank. Preferably, the spline improves the handleability and toughness of the siding plank. With the spline, the thickness of a medium density FC plank can be reduced without sacrificing handleability. For instance, FC planks that are about % to 3/16 inch thick can still be handleable without breaking at 16 ft length when the spline is attached to the plank. This provides a lightweight FC siding plank of increased length that is easier to handle and requires less material to manufacture.
[0026] In one embodiment, the spline comprises a butt and a lock and is designed for use in combination with a FC plank. Preferably, the butt is thick so that a deep shadow line can be produced when the planks are stacked together. Preferably, the lock is an angled lock that is configured to help secure the plank to adjacent planks in the stack. Preferably, the spline is bonded to the to the FC plank with an adhesive and the spline has one or more dovetail grooves in the adhesive surface area to strengthen the bond between the spline and the plank. In another embodiment, the spline has an overiap guide that helps set the gauge of the exposed plank face. However, it can be appreciated that the spline does not have to include a lock, an overiap guide or dovetail grooves.
[0027] It will be appreciated that the preferred embodiments of this invention are not limited to siding planks or interiocking features to mount one plank adjacent another. Thus, in one embodiment a fiber cement article, which may or may not be a siding lank, is provided having a reinforcing fixture adhered thereto.
The reinforcing fixture provides localized reinforcement to areas of the article that requires additional strength and/or support. [0028] These and other objects and advantages will become more fully apparent from the following description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
Brief Description of the Drawings
[0029] Figure 1 A shows an isometric view of one embodiment of a FC siding plank with a back surface visible.
[0030] Figure 1 B shows an isometric view of FC siding plank with a front surface visible.
[0031] Figure 2 shows an end view of FC siding plank.
[0032] Figure 3 shows a siding system of FC siding planks affixed to a mounting surface.
[0033] Figure 4 shows a method of installing a siding system according to one embodiment of the present invention.
[0034] Figure 5 shows an isometric view of a section of an FC plank in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
[0035] Figure 6 shows an end view of an extrusion die used to form the plank of Figure 5.
[0036] Figure 7 shows a cross-sectional view of a siding plank system in accordance with the embodiment of Figure 5 affixed to a mounting surface.
[0037] Figure 8 shows an isometric view of a section of an FC plank in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
[0038] Figure 9A shows an isometric vertical view of a two-piece FC plank in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
[0039] Figure 9B shows an isometric horizontal view of the two-piece FC plank of Figure 9A.
[0040] Figure 10 shows a side view of a first end of a butt piece used to form the plank of Figure 9A.
[0041] Figure 11 A shows an isometric view of the two-piece plank of Figure 9A formed using a pressure roller system.
[0042] Figure 11B shows an end view of the two-piece plank and pressure roller system of Figure 11 A.
[0043] Figure 12 shows one method for making a two-piece plank.
[0044] Figure 13 shows another method for making a two-piece plank.
[0045] Figure 14A shows an isometric view of a two-piece plank formed using a hand roller.
[0046] Figure 14B shows an end view of the two-piece plank and hand roller of Figure 14A.
[0047] Figure 15 shows a method of making a two-piece plank assembly using an adhesive.
[0048] Figure 16 shows a method of making a cementitious adhesive for bonding FC materials.
[0049] Figures 17A and 17B show schematic views of a Hobart style low shear mixer containing adhesive formulation in accordance with the method of Figure 16.
[0050] Figure 18 shows a dewatering apparatus containing mesh screens and a metal plate in accordance with the method of Figure 16. [0051] Figure 19 shows a high shear mixer containing an adhesive formulation in accordance with the method of Figure 16.
[0052] Figure 20A shows a partial perspective view of a two-piece FC plank assembly according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[0053] Figure 20B shows a partial perspective view of a two-piece FC plank assembly rotated 90° from Figure 20A.
[0054] Figure 21 shows a side view of the plank assembly of Figure 20A.
[0055] Figure 22 shows a cross-sectional view of two installed plank assemblies of Figure 20A.
[0056] Figure 23 shows a method of the installing plank assemblies of Figure 20A.
[0057] Figure 24 shows an isometric view of another embodiment of the FC plank assembly.
[0058] Figure 25 shows a cross-section of the plank assembly of Figure 24.
[0059] Figure 26 shows a key tip on the FC plank assembly of Figure 24.
[0060] Figure 27 shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lock assembly on the FC plank assembly of Figure 24.
[0061] Figure 28 shows a cross-sectional view of the lock assembly of Figure 27 with approximate dimensions.
[0062] Figure 29 shows a cross-sectional view of lock assembly and key of two adjacent FC plank assemblies.
[0063] Figure 30 shows a cross-sectional view of a siding system made up of two-piece planks with oversized "V" style lock and compressible regions in accordance with Figure 24.
[0064] Figure 31 shows a method of making the plank of Figure 24 with an oversized "V" style lock and compressible regions.
[0065] Figures 32A and 32B show alternate cross-sectional views of plank designs that could utilize first and second compressible regions.
[0066] Figure 33 shows an isometric view of a section of a siding plank assembly with a locking spline in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
[0067] Figure 34 shows an isometric view of the plank of Figure 33.
[0068] Figure 35 shows a cross-sectional view of the plank of Figure 33.
[0069] Figure 36 shows an isometric view of the locking spline of Figure 33.
[0070] Figure 37 shows a cross-section of the locking spline of Figure 33.
[0071] Figure 38 or end view shows an end view of the locking spline of Figure 33, with approximate dimensions.
[0072] Figure 39 shows a cross-sectional view of the siding plank assembly of Figure 33.
[0073] Figure 40 shows a cross-sectional view of an alternative siding plank assembly having a locking spline with a chamfer. [0074] Figure 41 shows a cross-sectional view of the two-piece siding plank system of Figure 33 affixed to a mounting surface.
[0075] Figure 42A shows a cross-sectional view of a plastic spline having a capillary break and dovetail grooves.
[0076] Figure 42B shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of a surface of the spline of Figure 42A having dovetail grooves.
[0077] Figure 43A shows a cross-sectional view of the spline of Figure 42A bonded to a main plank.
[0078] Figure 43B shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of the bond between the spline and main plank of Figure 43A.
[0079] Figure 44A shows a cross-sectional view of a two-piece siding plank assembly in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
[0080] Figure 44B shows a cross-sectional view of the two-piece siding system of Figure 44A affixed to a mounting surface.
[0081] Figure 45A shows a cross-sectional view of the two-piece siding plank assembly in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
[0082] Figure 45B shows a cross-sectional view of the siding system of Figure 45A affixed to a mounting surface.
[0083] Figure 46 shows the method steps for making a two-piece plank assembly using an FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline.
[0084] Figure 47 shows an isometric view of a section of a siding plank assembly in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
[0085] Figure 48 shows an isometric view of the plank of Figure 47.
[0086] Figure 49A shows a cross-sectional view of the plank of Figure 48.
[0087] Figure 49B shows a side view of the key tip of Figure 49A.
[0088] Figure 50 shows an isometric view of the locking spline of Figure 47.
[0089] Figure 51 shows a cross-sectional view of the locking spline of Figure 50.
[0090] Figure 52 shows an end view of the locking spline of Figure 50 with approximate dimensions.
[0091] Figure 53 shows a cross-section of the siding plank assembly of Figure 47.
[0092] Figure 54 shows a cross-sectional view of an alternative siding plank assembly with a chamfer.
[0093] Figure 55 shows a cross-sectional view of the two-piece siding plank system of Figure 47 affixed to a mounting surface.
[0094] Figure 56 shows a method for making a two-piece plank assembly using an FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline. [0095] Figure 57 shows an isometric view of a section of a siding plank assembly in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
[0096] Figure 58 shows an isometric view of the plastic spline with a capillary break of Figure 57.
[0097] Figure 59 shows a cross-sectional view of the spline of Figure 58.
[0098] Figure 60 shows an end view of the spline of Figure 58 with approximate dimensions.
[0099] Figure 61 shows a cross-sectional view of a two-piece siding plank system showing adjacent siding plank assemblies formed in accordance with Figure 57.
[0100] Figure 62 shows an isometric view of an alternative embodiment of plastic spline with a capillary break.
[0101 ] Figure 63 shows a cross-sectional view of the spline of Figure 62.
[0102] Figure 64 shows an end view of the spline of Figure 62.
[0103] Figure 65 shows a cross-sectional view of a two-piece siding plank system showing adjacent siding planks formed using the spline of Figure 62.
[0104] Figure 66 shows a cross-sectional view of a reinforced fiber cement article.
[0105] Figure 67 shows a front perspective view of a reinforced fiber cement plank with a nailing skirt.
[0106] Figure 68 shows a rear perspective view of a reinforced fiber cement plank with an extruded polymer reinforcing strip.
[0107] Figure 69 shows a rear perspective view of a multi-lap fiber cement plank.
[0108] Figure 70 shows a method of making a reinforced fiber cement article. Detailed Description of the Preferred Embodiments
[0109] Certain preferred embodiments of the invention generally relate to lightweight siding plank assemblies that are structured to secure the siding planks against lateral forces without face nailing and to create a uniform and deep shadow line. In some of these embodiments, the shape of the plank is achieved by adding a second material to a base plank to add function and/or aesthetics, such as a thick bottom edge and/or interlock. These and other features and functionality of the preferred embodiments are described in detail below.
[0110] Unlike other siding materials, fiber cement ("FC") materials have preferred qualities of non-combustibility, strength, and durability. Low-density FC has additional advantages over higher density FC because the material is more easily machined, and its decreased weight facilitates handling and installation. Manufacture of siding planks made of low-density and medium-density FC material, as described in Australian Patent No. AU 515151 and U.S. Patent No. 6,346,146, the entirety of each of which is hereby incoφorated by reference, having additional functional and aesthetic features could result in a more marketable siding plank.
[0111] One siding design, which uses a lock system, allows planks to be locked into one another without requiring extensive measurement to maintain gauge (the visible vertical distance between planks) and overlap (the vertical distance the plank overhangs the plank below) during installation. Although this lock design has many inherent advantages, this design affords little to no flexibility when being installed on a non-planar wall. Therefore, embodiments described below include a locking plank that allow the exterior siding to be installed on non-planar walls.
[0112] Moreover, certain lock designs do not function satisfactorily for small variations in gauge that are sometimes desired by installers, especially when trying to level-out inaccuracies in framing and installation around window and door openings. As a result of poorly fitted V-type lock and key siding, the plank may subsequently experience lateral movement (flapping) when subjected to wind. Rather, a lock design that allows for small variations in gauge while preventing lateral movement (flapping) when subjected to wind would be beneficial.
[0113] Furthermore, functional performance enhancements made to existing FC siding planks will bring great value to the siding plank market. For example, an alignment feature or fixing indicator, described below, adds value to FC siding planks by facilitating the installation process. Also, the appearance of nailable extruded products on the market has brought with it the need to provide nailing positions on the product to ensure proper and speedy installation. Accordingly, there is a sound business motivation to find a cost efficient way to add features such as affixing indicators to FC siding planks. Moreover, what is needed is also a way to form a stackable siding plank that secures the bottom edge from lateral forces and allows for hidden nailing under the lap of the siding planks, as described below.
[0114] Although the preferred embodiments of the present invention describe the use of fiber cement planks, it will be appreciated that other materials may be used as well. It will also be appreciated that the invention is not limited only to siding planks, but may have use in other applications as well. I. LOW-DENSITY SIDING PLANK WITH LOCKING FEATURES AND METHOD OF INSTALLING
THE SAME
[0115] At least one embodiment relates to a low density plank with locking features and methods of installing the same. In one embodiment, the siding plank is manufactured using a process, which includes but is not limited to the Hatschek process as described in U.S. Patent No. 6,346,146, the entirety of which is hereby incoφorated by reference, to make low-density FC materials. Low density fiber cement typically has a density ranging from about 0.7 to 1.2 g/cm3, whereas medium density typically has a density of about 1.3 to 1.5 g/cm3. This embodiment includes locking features to allow siding planks to be interlocked when installed on a mounting surface (e.g., an exterior wall) as siding.
[0116] Figure 1 A and Figure 1 B show two isometric views of a siding plank 1100. As shown in Figure 1A, siding plank 1100 includes a back surface 1110, an end surface 1115, a key 1130, and a lock 1140. As shown in Figure 1 B, siding plank 1100 further includes a front surface 1120. Table 1 shows preferred ranges of siding plank dimensions for this embodiment: Table 1. Preferred range of siding plank dimensions
Figure imgf000013_0001
[0117] Figure 2 shows an end view of siding plank 1100 that further describes key 1130 and lock 1140. Specifically, key 1130 further includes a key tip 1132 and makes an angle 1135 with a vertical plane. The key tip preferably forms a tier indented in the front surface of the plank. However, it will be appreciated that the key tip need not have a tier, and may have a variety of shapes and configurations, including those described below. Lock 1140 makes an angle 1145 (θ) with a vertical plane. Angle 1135 (θ) ranges in one embodiment from about 85 degrees to 30 degrees, and is preferably about 45 degrees. Angle 1145 preferably is approximately equal to angle 1135.
[0118] A commercially available spindle molder (not shown) is used in one embodiment to machine key 1130 and lock 1140 into siding plank 1100. A spindle molder is similar to woodcutting equipment; however, it is equipped with polycrystalline diamond (PCD) blades for improved performance in cutting FC products. Conventional machining methods for shaping FC material are used to cut the siding plank. The use of low density fiber cement is especially advantageous because it enables easy machining of the material and greater tool life. End surface 1115 is rectangular prior to machining.
[0119] Figure 3 shows a cross-sectional view of siding system 1500. As shown in Figure 3, a first nail 1540 rigidly attaches a first siding plank 1510 to a mounting surface 1560, such that first nail 1540 is completely hidden by the overiap (called "blind nailing"). Mounting surface 1560 is typically a series of wall studs. Key 1130 of first siding plank 1510 is inserted into lock or overiap region 1140 of second siding plank 1520. A second nail 1550 rigidly attaches a second siding plank 1520 to mounting surface 1560. The gap 1530 created between first siding plank 1510 and second siding plank 1520 should be of a size that is aesthetically pleasing. First siding plank 1510 and second siding plank 1520 are substantially identical to siding plank 1100 shown in Figure 1A, Figure 1B, and Figure 2.
[0120] Figure 4 shows a method 1600 of installing siding planks onto a mounting surface to form a siding system, which involves:
[0121] Mounting first siding plank 1610: First siding plank 1510 is placed against mounting surface 1560 as shown in Figure 3. First nail 1540 is driven into first siding plank 1510 near its upper edge to rigidly attach it to mounting surface 1560.
[0122] Aligning lock and key features 1620: Second siding plank 1520 is placed against mounting surface 1560 above first siding plank 1510 such that lock 1140 of second siding plank 1520 is aligned with key 1130 of first siding plank 1510, as shown in Figure 3.
[0123] Lowering second siding plank 1630: Second siding plank 1520 is lowered onto first siding plank 1510. As second siding plank 1520 is lowered (with the help of gravity) onto first siding plank 1510, key 1130 of first siding plank 1510 automatically engages and aligns lock 1140 of second siding plank 1520 into a locked position. In this locked position, key 1130 of first siding plank 1510 prevents second siding plank 1520 from moving under the influence of wind forces, and therefore prevents wind-induced damage. Further, the locked position fixes the gauge and overlap, and creates a uniform shadow line, as shown in Figure 3.
[0124] Mounting second siding plank 1640: Second nail 1550 is driven into second siding plank 1520 near its upper edge to rigidly attach it to mounting surface 1560. The method is then repeated to cover the mounting surface to form a larger siding system.
[0125] The embodiment described above has several advantages over the prior art. For instance, it avoids face nailing. Because nails are often used to achieve a tight and uniform fit between two siding planks, it is aesthetically preferable to avoid face nailing because the nail head cannot be hidden when finished. Advantageously, the siding plank assembly of this embodiment provides a way to mate two FC siding planks tightly and creates a uniform shadow line without requiring a face nail to fasten the two siding planks.
[0126] In addition, another advantage is that the embodiment uses gravity during installation to obtain a secure fit between the siding planks. Conventional siding planks such as vinyl offer interiocking features that require an upward motion against the force of gravity to interlock two adjacent siding planks into place. A more natural downward motion, taking advantage of the force of gravity, facilitates installation. Advantageously, the assembly of this embodiment uses gravity to help interlock the planks.
[0127] A further advantage of this embodiment is that it allows the nail or fastener to penetrate directly through the fiber cement plank, in contrast to conventional fiber cement siding planks that are adhered indirectly to a mounting surface. Direct fastening of the fiber cement plank can occur with the fastener penetrating through the plank to attach the plank to the mounting surface.
[0128] Moreover, siding planks in the prior art are often subjected to wind forces that may separate the siding planks from their mounting surface. The embodiment described above reduces the likelihood of damage caused by wind forces.
[0129] The "shadow line" is created by the thickness of a siding plank's bottom edge, which casts a shadow on the siding plank directly below it. A uniform shadow line is aesthetically desirable, and is usually achieved by face nailing the siding planks. The embodiment described above produces a uniform shadow line between two siding planks without requiring a face nail to fasten the siding planks.
[0130] Installers of exterior siding planks balance the desire to install the siding planks quickly against the need to carefully measure the gauge and overiap for consistency. Gauge is the visible vertical distance between siding planks, and the overiap is the vertical distance that an upper siding plank overhangs a lower siding plank. The key and lock features described above make installation of the siding planks progress more quickly, because the design of the siding planks maintain a consistent gauge and overiap without the need for these properties to be measured. [0131] It will be appreciated that the lock and key of the siding plank assembly described above is not limited to planks formed of a single piece of material. Thus, as described in further embodiments below, multiple piece siding systems may be used to form the desired aesthetic and functional aspects of the assembly. II. SIDING PLANKS HAVING AN EXTRUDED FIXING INDICATOR
[0132] In another embodiment, a plank is provided that has a fixing indicator and a fixing void or hollow beneath the fixing indicator. Described herein is a fiber cement product having a fixing indicator and a fixing void or hollow beneath the fixing indicator, and an apparatus for extruding an FC product having a fixing indicator. The result is an FC product that is easy to install and insures proper placement of the fixing device within a predetermined nailing region.
[0133] Figure 5 shows an isometric view of the FC plank of a preferred embodiment. Plank 10100 includes a plank front or outer surface 10110, a fixing indicator 10120 located in proximity to a plank first or upper edge 10130, a plank back or inner surface 10140, and an overlap region or locking region 10150 located in proximity to a plank second or lower edge 10160. Plank 10100 is preferably a siding plank manufactured of FC using a conventional extrusion process. Fixing indicator 10120 is a depression in plank outer surface 10110 formed by an extrusion die as shown in Figure 6. Likewise, overlap region 10150 is a depression in plank inner surface 10140 formed by the extrusion die shown in Figure 6.
[0134] Figure 6 is an end view of extrusion die 10200 of a preferred embodiment. Extrusion die 10200 includes a die outlet 10210 having a die outlet upper surface 10220, a fixing indicator dimple 10230, located in proximity to a die outlet first edge 10240, a die outlet lower surface 10250, and an overiap region form 10260 located in proximity to a die outlet second edge 10270. Extrusion die 10200 is a conventional extrusion die for use with FC mixtures. The opening of die outlet 10210 is shaped to form plank 10100 of Figure 5 as follows: die outiet upper surface 10220 forms plank outer surface 10110; fixing indicator dimple 10230 forms fixing indicator 10120; die outlet first edge 10240 forms plank first edge 10130; die outlet lower surface 10250 forms plank inner surface 10140; overiap region form 10260 forms overlap region 10150; and die outlet second edge 10270 forms plank second edge 10160. Fixing indicator dimple 10230 has a depth "d," a width "w," and is a distance "a" from die outlet first edge 10240. Preferably, the fixing indicator will comprise an embossed feature between 0.015 and 0.080 inches deep and more preferably between 0.035 and 0.055 inches deep. The indicator can be in the form of a regular or irregular geometric form or a symbol or letter that covers an area of approximately 0.0015 square inches to approximately 0.25 square inches, more preferably between 0.015 square inches and 0.0625 square inches. [0135] Figure 7 shows a siding plank system of a preferred embodiment. Siding system 10300 includes planks 10100A and 10100B, a wall 10310, and a nail 10320. Using a conventional blind nailing technique, plank assemblies 10100A and 10100B are fixedly connected to wall 10310 using nails (or screws, or staples). Figure 7 shows nail 10320 positioned in fixing indicator 10120 of plank 10100A and driven through plank 10100A into wall 10310. When installed, plank 10100B is positioned such that overlap region 10150 of plank 10100B covers nail 10320 and fixing indicator 10120 of plank 10100A. The first or upper edge 10130 of the plank thus forms a key tip that encases the overlap or locking region 10150.
[0136] It can be seen in Figure 7 that fixing indicator 10120 of a preferred embodiment insures that nail 10320 is not too close to the edge of plank 10100A, thereby preventing cracking or splitting of plank 10100A. Additionally, it can been seen that fixing indicator 10120 insures that nail 10320 is well within overiap region 10150 and is therefore not visible when installed.
[0137] Another embodiment, not shown, is an FC product having a plurality of fixing indicators 10120 in various locations on the outer surface of plank 10100.
[0138] Another embodiment, not shown, is an FC product having a groove on the inner surface of plank 10100 formed by extrusion similar to fixing indicator 10120 and used for gluing plank 10100 to wall 10310 of Figure 7.
[0139] In yet another embodiment, the fixing indicator could be formed using a post-extrusion marking technique, such as using a manual embossing in combination with a conventional Hatschek manufacturing process. Likewise, a manual embossing roller could be used in combination with a conventional extrusion process positioned in proximity to die outlet 10210 of extrusion die 10200 of a preferred embodiment.
[0140] As seen in Figure 8, another embodiment has fixing void 10421 optionally included below the line of the fixing indicator to relieve stress that can lead to break out and cracking of the top edge of the product when nailed or fastened to wall framing or sheathing. The fixing void could be formed using mandrel in the extrusion formation process.
[0141] Figure 8 shows an isometric view of the FC plank of a preferred embodiment. Plank 10400 is another example of an FC plank having a fixing indicator 10420. Plank 10400 shows an example of an aesthetically pleasing pattern on the outer surface of plank 10400 formed by extrusion in similar fashion as fixing indicator 10420 and a fixing void or hollow 10421 below the line of the fixing indicator.
[0142] Advantageously, the siding plank assembly of this embodiment provides an inexpensive affixing indicator on siding planks which reduces damage to the planks at installation due to improper affixing. Furthermore, the installation time of an extruded FC product is also reduced. Additionally, the siding plank assembly provides an aesthetic appearance as it conceals the affixing by limiting the affixing region to the overlap area between adjacently stacked planks. [0143] It will be appreciated that the fixing indicator could be formed using post-extrusion marking techniques such as, manual embossing, machining, ink jet or other printing, stamping, pressing, and painting techniques, which are all time-consuming and costly.
[0144] It will further be appreciated that the fixing indicator can be employed in several, if not all, of the siding plank assemblies described herein. For example, like the embodiment of Figures 1-3, the plank of Figure 5 similarly contains a lock in overlap region 10150 and a key tip for insertion into the lock at first edge 10130. Thus, it can be seen that a fixing indicator can be placed similariy on the key 130 of Figure 2. III. TWO-PIECE FC PLANK AND METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME
[0145] In further embodiments, a two-piece FC plank and a method of making the same are provided. These two-piece planks can be used to form the various shapes described throughout this specification in order to provide a lock and key, hidden nailing, a deep shadow line, and other features described herein. Two methods for forming a two-piece FC plank are described below.
[0146] It will be appreciated that several manufacturing processes for bonding two pieces of FC material together to form a product use standard industry adhesives. However, due to the composition of the FC material and adhesive, the time it takes for the two pieces of FC material to adhere ("adhesion time") is lengthy and the bonding strength of the two FC pieces is weakened. Thus, bonding processes that use standard industry adhesives decrease the durability of installed siding panels and delay the post-processing of the product, which increase the manufacturing cycle time of the product. Advantageously, the bonding process of the below-described embodiments provide a quick process for bonding two FC pieces together to form a durable bond.
A. First Roller Method
[0147] Figures 9A and 9B show isometric views of a two-piece FC plank 2100. Two-piece plank 2100 includes a main plank section 2140, a second piece or butt piece 2130, a first end 2120, and adhesive 2110. Main plank section 2140 is preferably a medium-density FC and is typically about 1/4 inch thick, but may be as thin as about 3/16 inch or less or as thick as about 1/2 inch or more. The width preferably ranges from about 5 to 12 inches, depending on the application. The length preferably ranges between about 12 to 16 feet, depending on the application. Main plank section 2140 may be manufactured with a smooth or textured surface. Further information regarding manufacture of main plank section 2140 may be found in Australian Patent No. AU 515151. Main plank section 2140 has an upper surface 2140U, also considered to be the back surface.
[0148] Butt piece 2130 is preferably made from a medium-density FC material, and is typically about 5/16 inch thick, but may be as thin as about 1/4 inch or less, or as thick as about 5/8 inch or more. The width of butt piece 2130 is typically about 1 1/2 inch, but may be as wide as about 2 inches or more, or as narrow as about 5/8 inch or less, depending on the application. The length is typically the same as main plank section 2140 (about 12 to 16 feet), depending on the application. Butt piece 230 has a lower surface 2130L, also considered the front surface. The function of butt piece 2130 is to reinforce main plank section 2140, thereby increasing the overall rigidity of plank 2100. A second function of butt piece 2130 is to provide thickness for an improved shadow line, a desired aesthetic quality.
[0149] Adhesive 2110, located between upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 and lower surface 2130L of butt piece 2130, in one embodiment is a fast setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane with a viscosity of about 10,000 to 100,000 CPS at application temperatures. Other embodiments for the adhesive 2110 are described below. The application temperature for adhesive 2110 ranges from about 200° to 325°F. The adhesion time ranges from about 3 to 5 seconds. The adhesion time is the time taken for the bond strength to develop after the adhesive is applied and nip pressing is performed.
[0150] In operation, adhesive 2110 is applied in beads on upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 along its length. This may be accomplished by using a Nordson hot-melt extrusion system. The adhesive beads are preferably spaced apart by a small distance, such as about 1" or 1/2". The preferred amount of adhesive is about 1 gram/foot/bead, though the amount may be as small as about 0.5 grams/foot/bead or as large as about 2 grams/foot/bead. Immediately upon applying adhesive 2110 (e.g., within about 3 seconds), lower surface 2130L of butt piece 2130 is interfaced with upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 such that first end 2120 of butt piece 2130 faces the center of main plank section 2140 as shown in Figure 9A. The arrangement of main plank section 2140 and butt piece 2130 forms two- piece plank 2100 having an upper surface 2100U and a lower surface 2100L. Preferably the bottom surfaces of the main plank section 2140 and the butt piece 2130 are preferably flush.
[0151] As shown in Figure 10, first end 2120 of butt piece 2130 makes an angle theta θ of about 15 degrees, but may range from about 0 degrees to 60 degrees, with the horizontal plane. The function of the angled surface is to aid water drainage.
[0152] Figures 11A and 11B show isometric and end views, respectively, of a pressure roller system 2200 for squeezing main plank section 2140 to butt end 2130. System 2200 includes a first roller 2210, and a second roller 2220.
[0153] First roller 2210 and second roller 2220 are preferably opposing 7-inch diameter steel rollers and are arranged parallel to and adjacent one another with a gap in between. In operation, plank 2100 is fed through the gap between first roller 2210 and second roller 2220. The gap between roller 2210 and 2220 is sized to engage plank 2100 with an interference fit. Thus, first roller 2210 is in direct contact with upper surface 2100U of butt piece 2130, and second roller 2220 is in direct contact with lower surface 2100L of plank 2140. Plank 2100 is transported through roller system 2200 at approximately 50 feet/minute. As plank 2100 transverses through roller system 2200, first roller 2210 and second roller 2220 compress plank 2100 at a pressure of approximately 750 lb/inch of roller width for approximately 3 to 5 seconds.
[0154] Figure 12 describes a method 2400 for making a two-piece medium density plank 2100, which involves: [0155] Melting adhesive 2410: Fast-setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane is melted in a hot- melt application system. One such system is commercially available from Nordson Corporation. Application temperatures range from about 200° to 325°F.
[0156] Are the plank and butt piece flat? 2420: The plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are viewed for flatness. If plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are determined to be flat, the process is continued to step 2430. If plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are determined to be wavy or uneven, refer to method 2500, as shown in Figure 13.
[0157] Applying adhesive 2430: Typically about 1 gram/foot/bead, but may be as small as about 0.5 g or as large as about 2 g, of hot-melt adhesive is applied in beads spaced about !4" to 1" apart on upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 (see Figure 9A) using the Nordson Coφoration system extrusion nozzle.
[0158] Placing butt-piece on adhesive 2440: Butt-piece 2130 is placed onto adhesive 2110, shown in Figure 9A and as described above.
[0159] Maintaining pieces under pressure 2450: Immediately (preferably within 3 seconds) upon completion of step 2440, plank 2100 is passed through roller system 2200, which maintains the plank under pressure (about 750 lb/inch of roller width) preferably for a minimum of 3 seconds to allow adhesive 2110 time to cool and bond with main plank section 2140 and butt piece 2130. The squeezing of main plank section 2140 and butt end 2130 causes the beads of adhesive 2110 to spread out in a thin layer.
[0160] The method, shown in Figure 12, is a process for maintaining pressure on plank 2100 when plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are both flat. However, a further process was developed to bond surfaces that have variable flatness, shown in Figure 13.
[0161] Figure 13 describes another method 2500 for a making two-piece medium density plank 2100, which involve:
[0162] Melting adhesive 2510: Fast-setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane is melted in a hot- melt application system. One such system is commercially available from Nordson Corporation. Application temperature of typically about 250°, but may range from about 200° to 325°F.
[0163] Are the plank and butt piece flat? 2520: The plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are viewed for flatness. If plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are determined to be flat, refer to method 2400, shown in Figure 12. If plank 2140 and butt piece 2130 are determined to be wavy or uneven, continue process to step 2530.
[0164] Applying adhesive 2530: Typically about 1 gram/foot/bead, but may be as small as about 0.5 g or as large as about 2 g, of hot-melt adhesive is applied in beads spaced about Vi to 1" apart (a minimum of 2 beads are preferably applied) on upper surface 2140U of main plank section 2140 (see Figure 9A) using the Nordson Coφoration system extrusion nozzle.
[0165] Placing butt-piece on adhesive 2540: Butt-piece 2130 is placed onto adhesive 2110, shown in Figure 9A and as described above. [0166] Maintaining pieces underpressure 2550: Immediately (preferably within about 9 to 12 seconds) upon completion of step 2540, plank 2100 is placed in a conventional hydraulic plate press or continuous press (not shown), which maintains the plank 2100 under pressure (about 750 psi) for a minimum of about 4 seconds to allow adhesive 2110 time to cool and bond with main plank section 2140 and butt piece 2130. The squeezing of main plank section 2140 and butt end 2130 causes the beads of adhesive 2110 to spread out in a thin layer.
[0167] Advantageously, the two-pieces of FC material can be bonded quickly so that post- bonding processes can be initiated immediately. Furthermore, bonding two FC material members together is more cost-effective than machining a single rectangular FC section to form the equivalent structure. The siding plank assembly creates an enhanced shadow line by virtue of the first end of the butt end extending partially over the upper surface of the main plank section and provides a traditional cedar look with a thick butt edge. The butt end piece also results in increased rigidity of the FC panel product so that it can be easily handled and installed.
[0168] It will be appreciated that although the shapes described herein are formed from two pieces of fiber cement, an equivalent shape can be formed by machining a solid rectangular section. However, this method may be more costly and produce a high amount of waste material. It will also be appreciated that additional shapes can be produced, such as described below, by abutting the two pieces together.
B. Second Roller Method
[0169] In another embodiment, a cementitious adhesive mixture, described below, is located between upper surface 2140U of plank 2140 and lower surface 2130L of butt piece 2130, as shown in Figures 9A and 9B. In operation, adhesive is applied to either upper surface 2140U of plank 2140 or lower surface 2130L of butt piece 2130 along its length. The thickness of applied adhesive 2110 is dependant upon the uniformity of textured surfaces 2130L and 2140U, typically in an amount that covers surfaces 2130L or 2140U, but preferably does not exceed about 1/8 inch.
[0170] As an alternative to the roller system described above, Figures 14A and 14B show plank assembly 3100, and include a hand roller 3210 and an interleaver 3150. Interieaver 3150 is a cured FC material used to support plank assembly and is in physical contact with lower surface 3140L of the plank. In operation, hand roller 3210 is in functional contact with upper surface 3130U of butt piece 3130. Hand roller 3210 is rolled along the length of plank assembly and is used to apply pressure to upper surface 3130U of butt piece 3130 while adhesive 3110 bonds plank 3140 and butt piece 3130 together.
[0171] Figure 15 illustrates the process for making a two-piece medium density plank assembly with the cementitious adhesive, described below. The method involves:
[0172] Applying adhesive 3310: Adhesive 3110 is applied to upper surface 3140U of plank 3140, shown in Figure 14A, 14B. [0173] Interfacing butt piece with plank 3320: Lower surface 3130L of butt-piece 3130 is interfaced with upper surface 3140U of plank 3140, shown in Figure 14A and 14B
[0174] Applying pressure to butt piece 3330: Hand roller 3210 is rolled over the length of surface 3130U of plank assembly 3100 in a direction normal to the upper 3130U and lower 3140L surfaces, shown in Figures 14A and 14B, to force contact of adhesive with fiber cement pieces, and provide adhesion between butt piece 3130 and plank 3140.
[0175] Pre-curing adhesive 3340: Plank assembly is air dried typically for about 12 hours, but may be as long as about 24 hours or more, or as short as about 8 hours or less.
[0176] Autoclaving plank assembly 3350: Plank assembly is autoclaved at a temperature between about 350° to 400°F at about 120 to 145 psi for a period of approximately 8 hours.
[0177] Trimming Plank Assembly 3360: Overflow of cementitious adhesive 3110 is trimmed from cured and autoclaved plank assembly.
[0178] The use of a cementitious adhesive as described below to adhere the two pieces of fiber cement together has all of the advantages described above for the polymeric adhesive. Another advantage is that a cementitious adhesive is compatible with fiber cement materials, is economical and can be co-cured with the fiber cement pieces to form a durable bond.
C. Cementitious Adhesive Composition
[0179] The embodiments described above for adhering two pieces of fiber cement plank together in one preferred embodiment utilize a novel cementitious adhesive composition. Thus, one aspect of the present invention provides a composition of matter for, and method of making a cementitious adhesive for bonding materials, preferably FC materials, and more preferably medium density FC materials. The adhesive ingredients preferably include cement, silica, thickener, and water, and may include organic fibers or inorganic fibers. The adhesive formulation can be used to bond FC materials prior to autoclaving.
[0180] It will be appreciated that a preferred adhesive is able to withstand autoclave temperatures and is compatible with FC materials. Most conventional polymeric adhesives and polymer- modified adhesives melt, bum, or degrade when exposed to temperatures in excess of approximately 375 degrees F. During the manufacturing process, FC materials are dried in an autoclave that can reach approximately 400 degrees F. Therefore, conventional polymeric adhesives cannot be used to bond FC materials prior to autoclaving.
[0181] Moreover, a preferred adhesive selected for use on FC materials should be compatible and as similar in composition as possible to the materials being bonded. This ensures that the system as a whole will respond to environmental factors in a similar manner within each component (environmental factors include temperature fluctuations, acid rain impacts, humidity, and wet-dry cycles). The adhesive and the FC materials will age similariy and thus will not weaken the system.
[0182] Advantageously, the adhesive composition of this embodiment can withstand curing temperatures in an autoclave and is compatible with the FC material to be bonded. Furthermore, the adhesive composition is less costly, more readily available, and more environmentally friendly compared with polymeric or polymer-modified adhesives. Unlike other adhesives, the adhesive composition also does not degrade under alkaline or moist conditions.
[0183] The cement, silica, and thickener are all added to the adhesive mix in powdered form, where the particle size for each ingredient may measure up to about 200 microns. The cement may be present in the formulation in an amount between about 10 and 90 wt %, the silica may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 90 wt %, and the thickener may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 2 wt %. Water may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 90 wt %. (All references to weight in this document are provided on a dry material weight basis, unless otherwise indicated.)
[0184] The organic fiber in the formulation may be in the form of cellulose fiber (where the fiber may be bleached pulp), and may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 5 wt %. The inorganic fiber in the formulation may be in the form of Wollastonite, and may be present in the formulation in an amount up to about 30 wt %. Both forms of fiber (organic and inorganic) may measure up to about 3 mm in length.
Table 2. Exemplifying formulations of cementitious adhesive.
Figure imgf000022_0001
[0185] Table 2 shows three exemplifying formulations of cementitious adhesive. Each formulation contains cement to form the body of the bond, and fine-ground silica to react and bind with cement when autoclaved. The silica also acts as a filler/aggregate that lowers the cost of the matrix, without significantly reducing performance. Thickener slows the water being drawn from the slurry (adhesive) into the fiber cement. The presence of thickener ensures that the cementitious adhesive remains "tacky" during the bonding process of the fiber cement surfaces, ensures that the adhesive fills the gap between the pieces to be bonded, and "wets out" the second surface, which is necessary to develop a good cementitious bond. The thickener also slows/reduces settling in the slurry and prolongs "open time" to add viscosity to the wet adhesive.
[0186] Formulation 1 and Formulation 3 additionally contain fiber to increase the bond strength. Both organic and inorganic fibers perform similarly in the formulation; however, organic fiber requires preparation for use, and inorganic fiber tends to be more costly to purchase than organic fiber. Although fiber adds strength to the adhesive formulation, it can also clog some applicators during use. To address this issue, Formulation 2 contains no fiber. Water is added as a necessary reactant for the cement in forming the hydrated cementitious bond. Water also provides the mixture "viscosity" necessary to mix the adhesive, to disperse fibers and solids through the mixture, and to apply the adhesive.
[0187] Figure 16 shows a method 4100 of making cementitious adhesive for bonding medium- density FC materials that includes:
[0188] Step 4110: Does adhesive formula contain fiber? In this step, method 4100 proceeds to step 4112 if the formulation being made contains fibers. Otherwise, method 4100 proceeds to step 4115.
[0189] Step 4112: Does adhesive formula contain organic fiber? In this step, method 4100 proceeds to step 4130 if the formulation being made contains organic fibers. Otherwise, the formulation is presumed to contain inorganic fibers and method 4100 proceeds to step 4120.
[0190] Step 4115: Mixing silica, cement and water. In this step, method 4100 adds the powdered silica to water to produce a 50 wt % silica slurry, and then transfers the silica slurry to a mixer (such as a Hobart mixer). Method 4100 adds powdered cement and water to bring the percent by weight of solids to approximately about 68% to 70% (approximately about 430 to 470 milliliters total water per kilogram of solids), and then mixes the adhesive formulation for about five minutes to attain homogeneity in the mixture. An example of a Hobart mixer is shown in Figure 17. Method 4100 then proceeds to step 4140. Figure 17 is a schematic of Hobart style low shear mixer 4200 containing an adhesive foπnulation. Both views A and B include a Hobart mixing bowl 4210 and an adhesive formulation 4240. In view A, a ribbon blade 4220 blends adhesive formulation 4240, and in alternate view B, a whisk blade 4230 blends adhesive formulation 4240. Either blade may be used to obtain similar results.
[0191] Step 4120: Mixing silica, inorganic fiber, cement, and water. In this step, method 4100 adds the powdered silica to water to produce a 50 wt % silica slurry, and then transfers the silica slurry to a mixer (such as a Hobart mixer, shown in Figure 17). Method 4100 adds the powdered cement and water, adds extra water to bring the percent by weight of solids to approximately 67% to 68% (approximately 470 to 500 milliliters total water per kilogram of solids), and mixes the adhesive formulation for about five minutes. Method 4100 then proceeds to step 4140.
[0192] Step 4130: Dispersing organic fiber in water. In this step, method 4100 adds the organic fiber, such as unbleached or bleached pulp. The pulp is previously hydropulped, refined, and diluted with water to about 0.4% by weight. Method 4100 mixes and disperses the organic fiber for approximately five minutes.
[0193] Step 4132: Mixing silica and cement. In this step, method 4100 adds the silica and then the cement to the organic fiber, and mixes the mixture. The preferable approach is to mix the ingredients of silica, cement, and fiber, then to blend the ingredients for five minutes in a mixer (such as a Hobart mixer, shown in Figure 17) to attain homogeneity in the mixture. [0194] Step 4134: Dewatering mix (optional). Following step 4132, a dewatering apparatus 4300, shown in Figure 18, dewaters the mix to achieve a thin paint consistency as described below. Method 4100 then proceeds to step 4140.
[0195] Figure 18 is a schematic of a dewatering apparatus 4300, which includes a first side 4310, a second side 4320, a third side 4330, and a fourth side 4340. In one embodiment, each side of dewatering apparatus 4300 preferably has identical length, width, and height. In another embodiment, each side would measure approximately ten inches long and three inches high. The sides are arranged such that first side 4310 and third side 4330 are parallel to each other, second side 4320 and fourth side 4340 are parallel to each other, and each side is joined to two other sides at 90 degree angles (e.g., first side 4310 is arranged at a 90 degree angle to second side 4320 and fourth side 4340), as shown in Figure 18.
[0196] Dewatering apparatus 4300 is designed to hold a perforated metal plate 4316, a coarse mesh screen 4314 and a fine mesh screen 4312. Views A, B, and C in Figure 18 show plan views of screens 4312 and 4314, and plate 4316, respectively. Fine mesh screen 4312 conforms to ASTM#325; coarse mesh screen 4314 conforms to ASTM#10; and plate 4316 is approximately 3/16" thick, and is perforated with round VA" diameter holes 4317, at a frequency of 9 holes per square inch. Screens 4312 and 4314, and plate 4316 may be made of metal or other comparable materials to provide similar functionality.
[0197] In operation, the adhesive formulation is poured into dewatering apparatus 4300. A set of mesh screens and a metal plate (not shown) identical to 4312, 4314, and 4316 are stacked in reverse order on top of the set inside 4300 so that the screens and plates are parallel to each other, and the adhesive formulation is contained between the two sets. Downward pressure applied to the screens and plates dewaters the adhesive formulation. Water either exits through the bottom of dewatering apparatus 4300 or a vacuum apparatus (not shown) may optionally be used to remove pooled liquid from the top of the screens and plates.
[0198] Sfep 4140: Transferring to high shear mixer. In this step, the adhesive formulation 4240 is added to a high shear mixer, as shown in Figure 19. Figure 19 shows a high shear mixer 4400 containing an adhesive formulation 4240. The adhesive formulation 4240 is added to a high shear mixing bowl 4410, where a high shear mixing blade 4420 revolves at a speed sufficient to create a vortex in the center of the mixing bowl (approximately 6000 RPM) and completely integrate all ingredients.
[0199] Step 4142: Adding thickener. In this step, method 4100 adds thickener to high shear mixer 4400 as required to achieve a thick paint consistency. Thickeners may be made of commercially available cellulose derivatives, polyurethane and polyacrylate, such as "Bermocell" (cellulose ether), "Ethocel"
(ethyl cellulose polymer), "Cellosize" (hydroxy ethyl cellulose), or "Natrosol" (hydroxyl ethyl cellulose and derivatives). One preferred thickener is "Natrosol Plus D430", a cellulosic derivative (hydrophobically modified hydroxy ethyl cellulose). The amount of thickener in one embodiment is nominally 0.5 wt %; however, more may be added to achieve the desired viscosity. A visual determination is sufficient to ascertain desired viscosity of the adhesive formulation. [0200] It will be appreciated that other adhesives may be used to bond the FC materials. These include polymers or polymer-modified adhesives (called "thin-sets") to bond the FC materials. However, these products may not be suited for exposure to high temperatures in an autoclave. Plastics degrade at approximately 375 degrees F and break down during autoclaving. In addition, the polymers and polymer- modified adhesives are more costly to use compared with the preferred adhesives described above. IV. VARIOUS DESIGNS OF TWO-PIECE FC PLANKS
[0201] The one and two-piece FC planks described above advantageously enable the formation of a variety of different shapes that provide a variety of desired features to the plank. Various designs are described below with respect to two-piece planks. However, it will be appreciated that similar shapes can be formed using one piece of material or other combinations of materials, such as described below.
A. Two-Piece Medium Density Plank with Locking Feature and Method of Making the Same
[0202] In one embodiment, a two-piece FC plank includes a butt piece having a lock such as described above. As shown in Figure 20A and Figure 20B, plank assembly 5100 includes a plank 5140, a butt piece 5130, and adhesive 5110. In this embodiment, plank 5140 further includes a key 5160, and butt piece 5130 further includes a lock 5150.
[0203] Figure 21 shows a side view of plank assembly 5100. As shown in Figure 21 , lock 5150 makes a lock angle 5285 with respect to horizontal line 5290. Lock angle 5285 in one embodiment ranges from approximately 5 degrees to 60 degrees, more specifically about 45 degrees is preferred. Key 5160 makes an angle of key angle 5275 in one embodiment with respect to horizontal line 5280. Key angle 5275 ranges from approximately 5 degrees to 60 degrees, more specifically about 45 degrees is preferred, but in any case substantially equal to lock angle 5285. Methods of cutting lock 5150 and key 5160 (e.g. using saw blades, high speed molders, abrasive grinding tools, or a router fitted with cutting tools for FC materials) are well known in the art.
[0204] Figure 22 shows a cross-sectional view of two installed plank assemblies. As shown in Figure 22, a first nail 5340 rigidly attaches a first plank assembly 5300 to a mounting surface 5360. Mounting surface 5360 is typically a wall stud. A second nail 5350 rigidly attaches a second plank assembly 5310 to mounting surface 5360. First plank assembly 5300 and second plank assembly 5310 are substantially identical to plank assembly 5100 previously described. First plank assembly 5300 includes key 5320, which is inserted into lock 5330 of second plank assembly 5310.
[0205] Figure 23 shows a method of installing plank assemblies onto a mounting surface, including the following steps:
[0206] Step 5410: Mounting first plank assembly. In this step, first plank assembly 5300 is placed against mounting surface 5360 as shown in Figure 22. First nail 5340 is driven into first plank assembly 5300 to rigidly attach it to mounting surface 5360. [0207] Step 5420: Aligning lock and key features. In this step, second plank assembly 5310 is placed against mounting surface 5360 above first plank assembly 5300 such that lock 5330 of second plank assembly 5310 is aligned with key 5320 of first plank assembly 5300, as shown in Figure 22.
[0208] Step 5430: Lowering second plank assembly. In this step, second plank assembly 5310 is lowered onto first plank assembly 5300. As plank assembly 5310 is lowered (with the help of gravity) onto first plank assembly 5300, key 5320 of first plank assembly 5300 automatically engages and aligns lock 5330 of second plank assembly 5310 into a locked position. In this locked position, key 5320 of first plank assembly 5300 prevents second plank assembly 5310 from moving under the influence of wind forces, and therefore prevents wind-induced damage.
[0209] Step 5440: Mounting second plank assembly. In this step, second nail 5350 is driven into second plank assembly 5310 to rigidly attach it to mounting surface 5360.
[0210] Advantageously, the siding plank assembly of this assembly can be used to mate two siding planks tightly and uniformly without requiring a visible nail fastening the overlapping region of the two planks to resist high wind loads. Furthermore, the siding plank assembly requires no starter strip at the base of the wall to provide the lap plank angle of the first installed plank. The lock and key also set the horizontal gauge of the exposed plank face without requiring frequent measuring.
[0211] It will be appreciated that another way to prevent wind forces from damaging planks is to nail the butt piece down. However, this method is time extensive, may cause breaks or splits in the FC material, and reduces the aesthetic appeal of the installed plank.
B. Plank Having Oversized "V" Style Lock and Compressible Regions, and Method of Making Same
[0212] In another embodiment, a two-piece FC plank utilizes an oversized "V style lock system and added compressible material to provide added ease of installation and aesthetic value. This embodiment also applies to any plank of similar shape that uses a locking mechanism in place of face nailing an outer plank bottom edge to an inner plank top edge, where the inner plank top edge has been nailed to a frame. The "V" style lock allows planks to be locked into one another without requiring extensive measurement to maintain gauge (the visible vertical distance between planks) and overlap (the vertical distance the plank overhangs the plank below) during installation.
[0213] The design described below is particularly advantageous for walls that are not completely planar. When installing exterior siding, it is common to encounter walls that are not completely planar. For example, wood studs within a wall may bow when the wood dries after installation and create a non-planar or "wavy" wall. This presents both installation problems and finishing issues. If a "V" style FC plank does not lock completely (such that both planks being locked are flat against the wall), the gauge and overlap vary across the wall. As a result of being poorly fitted, the plank may subsequently experience lateral movement (flapping) when subjected to wind. [0214] Advantageously, the planks described herein are more easily installed on non-planar walls because they can fit together without excessive force. Furthermore, the lock and key design will maintain gauge and overlap better than other "V" style lock designs. As such, the planks will look better on the wall because they will be straighter than the frame, which is often non-planar.
[0215] Figure 24 shows an isometric view of a FC plank assembly 6100, which includes a plank body 6105, a lock assembly 6150, and an adhesive 6115. Plank body 6105 is fixedly connected to lock assembly 6150 via an adhesive layer 6115, as shown in Figure 24. Adhesive 6115 is preferably a polymeric hot-melt adhesive or a cementitious adhesive. The method of making a two-piece plank bonded with one of these two adhesives is described above. Table 3 shows preferred ranges of plank body 6105 dimensions for one embodiment:
Table 3. Preferred range of plank dimensions
Figure imgf000027_0001
[0216] Figure 25 shows a cross-section of plank assembly 6100 taken along line 25-25 shown in Figure 24. This view shows how lock front surface 6370 is bonded to plank back surface 6120 via adhesive 6115. The method used to bond lock front surface 6370 to plank back surface 6120 is the same as that described above. Figure 26 shows a key 6200, part of plank assembly 6100, in greater detail. Key 6200 includes key tip 6210, which is a surface cut on a horizontal plane, parallel to horizontal line 6212, to "blunf the edge between plank front surface 6215 and plank top surface 6110. The length of key tip 6210 is Xk, as shown in Figure 26. Length Xk may vary in one embodiment from about 1/16" to 3/16". Plank top surface 6110 is cut at an angle θ, relative to horizontal line 6212, which may range from about 5 degrees to 60 degrees.
[0217] Figure 27 shows the lock assembly 6150 in greater detail, including a lock inner angled surface 6315, where first compressible region 6310 is located, a lock inner surface 6325, where second compressible region 6320 is located, and a lock inner blunted surface 6330. The length of lock inner blunted surface 6330 is Xι, as shown in Figure 27. Length Xι may range from about Xk + 1/16" to Xk + 1/8." First compressible region 6310 and second compressible region 6320 may be constructed of compressible materials, such as polyurethane elastomeric foam, rubber, rubber foam, or silicone rubber.
[0218] Again in reference to Figure 27, lock inner blunted surface 6330 is shown at an about 90-degree angle to lock front surface 6370. The puφose of "blunting" the shaφ cut where lock inner surface 6325 and lock inner angled surface 6315 meet is to provide a substantially flat surface rather than a sliding point for the plank assembly to be locked into the plank assembly above. Lock inner blunted surface 6330 provides a more positive gauge for the plank assembly. [0219] Figure 28 shows the approximate dimensions of lock assembly 6150. Preferred ranges for the labeled dimensions in Figure 27 and Figure 28 are shown below in Table 4.
Table 4. Preferred range of variables for lock assembly dimensions as shown in Figures 27 through 29
Figure imgf000028_0001
[0220] Figure 29 illustrates how key 6200 of a first plank assembly 6510 fits into lock assembly 6150 of a second plank assembly 6520, and how the shape of lock assembly 6150 and key 6200 enhance the performance of the plank assembly. Lock inner blunted surface 6330 and key tip 6210 are each cut at 90- degree angles to plank front surface 6215. This design allows the plank assemblies some lateral compensation for installation on non-planar walls. Although lock assembly 6150 may shift laterally after being installed, the overlap is maintained because key tip 6210 and blunted surface 6330 do not shift vertically. First compressible region 6310 and second compressible region 6320 have been added to the embodiment to seal lock assembly 6150 with key 6200, and to absorb lateral movement of plank assembly 6510 and 6520. The existence of compressible regions 6310 and 6320 also increases the ease of installation because the plank assemblies can be locked into place without requiring excessive force. The second plank assembly 6520 locked into the first plank assembly 6510 below it can move within the compressible distance between lock inner angled surface 6315 and the top of first compressible region 6310, and between lock inner surface 6325 and the top of second compressible region 6320.
[0221] Because the wall frame is often not "plumb" (the wall may be non-planar), the top surface of key 6200 does not form a straight line. By allowing the bottom surface of second plank assembly 6520 to move relative to the key 6200, the l∞k assembly 6150 can still be straight when placed over the key 6200 (it is being held straight by its own stiffness). Although not perfect, the arrangement is a considerable improvement in the waviness of the wall compared with just following the faults in the frame. [0222] Figure 30 shows how a siding system 6400 appears after installation on a mounting surface 6410. Mounting surface 6410 is typically made of a series of wall studs (not shown). Plank assemblies 6400A, 6400B, 6400C, and 6400D are installed such that each plank assembly locks into the plank assembly below it. For example, nail 6420A fixes the top of plank assembly 6400A to mounting surface 6410. Plank assembly 6400B is installed directly above it, such that the oversized "V" style lock secures plank assembly 6400B. Nail 6420B then fixes the top of plank assembly 6400B to mounting surface 6410. This process is repeated with plank assembly 6400C, plank assembly 6400D, nail 6420C, and any additional plank assemblies and nails required to cover the mounting surface as desired.
[0223] The lock and key design, combined with compressible regions 6310 and 6320, provide some "give" (lateral compensation) in siding system 6400. As a result, the siding will compensate for moderate non-planarity of mounting surface 6410 and siding system 6400 will appear planar (flat).
[0224] Figure 31 shows a flow chart of a method 6500 of making a two-piece FC plank with an oversized "V" style lock and compressible regions, including the steps of:
[0225] Step 6510: Manufacturing plank. In this step, a plank is preferably manufactured according to conventional Hatschek methods.
[0226] Step 6520: Bonding plank pieces. In this step, plank body 6105 is bonded to lock assembly 6150 to form the plank assembly 6100 shown in Figure 24. The method of bonding two pieces of FC material to form a two-piece plank either using a polymeric hot-melt adhesive or a cementitious adhesive is described above in greater detail. Some alternate embodiments may not require this step if they do not include bonded pieces.
[0227] Step 6530: Machining plank to foπn key and lock. In this step, planks are fabricated and machined to the requisite shape. In reference to Figures 24-26, plank body 6105 is cut to form the plank top surface 6110 and plank bottom surface 6130. Specifically, plank top surface 6110 is cut (to form the key) at an angle of θ, which ranges from about 5 degrees to 60 degrees, as shown in Figure 26. Plank bottom surface 6130 is cut at an angle of β, which ranges from about 0 to 30 degrees, as shown in Figure 27. To form the lock assembly 6150, the bonded piece is first cut at angle beta to form lock bottom surface 6360, as shown in Figure 27. The remaining surfaces of lock assembly 6150 are cut to meet the specifications of length and angle listed in Table 4 above. Moreover, this step uses the same method as described above in making a two-piece plank with a lock and key design, including steps required to cut the plank.
[0228] Step 6540: Attaching compressible regions. In this step, first compressible region 6310 and second compressible region 6320 are attached to lock assembly 6150. Materials that may be used for compressible regions 6310 and 6320 include commercially available products such as polyurethane elastomeric foam, rubber, rubber foam, and silicone rubber. The compressible regions are applied using conventional application methods, such as "Nordsons" FoamMelt <R> application equipment such as the Series 130, applied at about 250 degrees F to 350 degrees F. First compressible region 6310 is applied to the length of the lock assembly 6150 along lock inner angled surface 6315, and second compressible region 6320 is applied to the length of lock assembly 6150 along lock inner surface 6325, as shown in Figure 27. The thickness y of compressible region 6310 and compressible region 6320, as shown in Table 4, may range from about 1/32" to 1/8".
[0229] This particular embodiment describes a two-piece plank; however, the use of compressible regions may be applied to other plank designs as well. Some examples of planks that could utilize this feature are any of the above-described one or two piece planks and the below-described plank having a plastic spline. An extruded plank could utilize this feature, as could any plank of similar shape that uses a locking mechanism in place of face nailing an outer plank bottom edge to an inner plank top edge, where the inner plank top edge has been nailed to a frame. Exemplifying diagrams of two plank designs that could utilize the compressible regions are shown in Figure 32.
[0230] Figure 32A and 32B show plank designs that could utilize compressible regions to enhance the plank functionality. Figure 32A shows extruded plank 6810 with first compressible region 6812A and second compressible region 6814A. Figure 32B shows hollow plank 6820 with first hollow region 6815 and second hollow region 6817, where the hollow regions may be filled with foam or other material, or left open with no fill, and also shows first compressible region 6812B and second compressible region 6814B.
[0231] The design described above advantageously allows planks to be more easily installed on non-planar walls because they can be fit together without excessive force. The compressible material also advantageously forms a capillary break, such as described below. Furthermore, the compressible material acts as a seal against wind and rain. V. TWO-PIECE PUNK HAVING A PLASTIC SPLINE
[0232] In additional embodiments, a plastic spline having a butt and lock is provided, which is designed for use in combination with a FC plank for a siding application. The result is a two-piece FC plank assembly having an FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline having a butt and lock.
[0233] Advantageously, the siding assembly of these embodiments provide a lightweight siding assembly having a reduced amount of the FC material while maintaining an aesthetically pleasing shadow line when installed. They also provide for a low-cost siding assembly with increased stiffness and strength, which reduces breakage and improves handleability and ease of installation. The siding assembly is also suitable for blind nailing and capable of high wind loads. The spline can also be easily manufactured from plastic with fine details using an extrusion and or molding processes well known in the art. The term plastic includes, but is not limited to, polymeric resins, copolymers and blends thereof with suitable flexural and tensile strength for the anticipated use and a heat deflection point well above the maximum normally experienced in the building environment (approximately 40°C to 60° C). Such plastics could include but are not limited to: polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyolefin, polyamide (nylon), and ABS. These plastics can contain mineral fillers to reduce cost or weight and improve strength or toughness properties. Altematively, these plastics may also contain fibers to improve tensile strength. The plastic spline can be manufactured using low grade or recycled plastic for additional cost savings without sacrificing desired attributes.
A. Spline with Angled Lock
[0234] Figure 33 shows an isometric view of the siding plank assembly of one preferred embodiment. Plank assembly 7400 includes a plank 7100 and a spline 7200. Plank 7100 is preferably a siding plank manufactured of medium-density FC material using a well-known Hatschek process. Spline 7200 is a "butt and lock" type spline manufactured of rigid plastic using a well-known extrusion process. Spline 7200 is aligned and is fixedly connected with an adhesive to plank 7100 (described in greater detail below).
[0235] Figure 34 shows an isometric view of the FC siding plank of a preferred embodiment. Plank 7100 is a siding plank that includes a plank top surface 7105, and a plank back surface 7120. Plank 7100 has a length "I", a width "w", a height "h", and a flat "t". An example of plank 7100 dimensions include "I" between about 12 and 16 feet, "w" between about 3/16 and 1/2 inches, "h" between about 5 and 12 inches, and T between about 0 and 1/4 inches. A cross-sectional diagram of plank 7100 is shown in Figure 35.
[0236] Figure 35 is a cross-sectional diagram of plank 7100 taken along line 35-35 of Figure 34. In this view, additional details of the plank 7100 are visible. Plank 7100 further includes a plank bottom surface 7110 and a plank front surface 7115. Also shown are plank top surface 7105 and plank back surface 7120. Plank top surface 7105 is set at an angle "α" to plank front surface 7115. Plank bottom surface 7110 is set at an angle "β" to plank front surface 7115. In one example, "α" is 45° and "β" is 84°. Angles "α" and "β" of plank 7100 are cut using angled water jet cutters during normal Hatschek manufacturing processing. Preferred dimensions and angles of plank 7100 are indicated in Table 5.
Table 5: Plank 7100 dimensions
Figure imgf000031_0001
[0237] Figure 36 shows an isometric view of the plastic locking spline of a preferred embodiment. Spline 7200 includes a generally vertical plate 7205, a plate back surface 7210, a first flange 7215, a first flange top surface 7220, a second flange 7230, a third flange 7240, a third flange top surface 7245, and a fourth flange 7255. Spline 7200 has a length "I", a width V, and a height "h". An example of spline 7200 dimensions include "I" between about 12 and 16 feet, V between about 3/8 and 3/4 inches, and "h" between about 1/2 and 2 inches. A cross-sectional diagram of spline 7200 is shown in Figure 37.
[0238] Figure 37 is a cross-sectional diagram of spline 7200 taken along line 37-37 of Figure 36. In this view, additional details of the spline 7200 are visible. Spline 7200 further includes a first flange bottom surface 7225, a second flange front surface 7235, a third flange bottom surface 7250, and a fourth flange front surface 7260. Also shown is plate 7205, plate back surface 7210, first flange 7215, first flange top surface 7220, second flange 7230, third flange 7240, third flange top surface 7245, and fourth flange 7255.
[0239] A first edge of first flange 7215 is integrally connected at an angle to a first edge of elongated plate 7205. A second edge of elongated plate 7205 is integrally connected at an angle along third flange 7240 between the first and second edges of third flange 7240. A first edge of fourth flange 7260 is integrally connected to a second edge of third flange 7240 in parallel with plate 7205. A first edge of second flange 7230 is integrally connected along first flange 7215 between the first and second edges of first flange 7215 in parallel with plate 7205. Second flange 7230 and fourth flange 7260 are coplanar.
[0240] Figure 38 is an end view of spline 7200. Approximate dimensions and angles of a preferred embodiment of spline 7200 are indicated in Table 6.
Table 6: Spline 7200 dimensions
Figure imgf000032_0001
[0241] Figure 39 is a cross-sectional diagram of plank assembly 7400 taken along line 39-39 of Figure 33. In this view, additional details of the plank assembly 7400 are visible. Plank assembly 7400 further includes a first adhesive layer 7410, a second adhesive layer 7420, and a third adhesive layer 7430. With continuing reference to Figure 39, the position of spline 7200 is shown in relation to plank 7100. First flange top surface 7220 forms a landing adapted to support a bottom portion of the plank 7100 and is fixedly connected to plank bottom surface 7110 with first adhesive layer 7410. Second flange front surface 7235, which forms part of the landing, is fixedly connected to plank back surface 7120 with second adhesive layer 7420. Fourth flange front surface 7260 is fixedly connected to plank back surface 7120 with third adhesive layer 7430. Third adhesive layer 7430 is formed to direct water away from the joint.
[0242] Adhesive layer 7410, 7420 and 7430 is preferably a fast setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane such as H.B. Fuller 2570x or H.B. Fuller 9570 with a viscosity of about 10,000 to 100,000 CPS at application temperatures ranging from about 200° to 350°F. The adhesion time ranges from about 3 to 5 seconds. [0243] Figure 40 shows the same details as Figure 39 with the addition of a chamfer 7450. Chamfer 7450 is placed at an angle "ε" relative to plank front surface 7115 and may be flat or slightly rounded. Angle "ε" is preferably in the range of about 30 to 60 degrees. With continuing reference to Figure 40, chamfer 7450 is accomplished by cutting or grinding plank 7100, first adhesive 7410 and spline 7200 such that the three elements are "blended". Chamfer 7450 creates a smooth and aesthetically pleasing drip-edge for plank assembly 7400, suitable for painting. As chamfer 7450 is exposed to the weather, first adhesive 7410 acts as a seal between plank 7100 and spline 7200, blocking wind and moisture.
[0244] Figure 41 shows a two-piece siding plank system of a preferred embodiment. Siding system 7500 includes plank assemblies 7400A, 7400B, 7400C and 7400D, a wall 7510, and nails 7520A, 7520B, and 7520C. Using a well-known blind nailing technique, plank assemblies 7400A, 7400B, 7400C, and 7400D are fixedly connected to wall 7510 using nails 7520A, 7520B, and 7520C, respectively (i.e. nails are driven through plank front surface 7115 of plank 7100 (Figure 35) in proximity to plank top surface 7105).
[0245] Third flange bottom surface 7250 and plate back surface 7210 of plank assembly 7400B are positioned in contact with plank top surface 7105 and plank front surface 7115 of plank assembly 7400A, respectively. Likewise plank assembly 7400C and 7400D are positioned in contact with plank assembly 7400B and 7400C, respectively.
[0246] Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly with a plastic spline and lock, wherein the plastic spline has one or more dove-tail grooves in the first flange top surface, second flange front surface, and fourth flange front surface, with the grooves running along the length of the surfaces, such as described below.
[0247] Figure 42A shows a cross-sectional view of spline 7200 with the above-mentioned dovetail grooves. The exploded view in Figure 42B shows one or more dovetail grooves in first flange top surface 7220, second flange front surface 7235 and fourth flange front surface 7260 of spline 7200. The dovetail groove 7220 provides a mechanical bond together with the adhesive bond to plank 7100 of plank assembly 7400 (Figure 33). This is illustrated in Figures 43A and 43B.
[0248] Figure 43A shows a cross-sectional view of plank assembly 7400. The exploded view in Figure 43B illustrates the interface of spline 7200, adhesive layer 7410, 7420 or 7430 and plank 7100. Figure 43B shows adhesive layer 7410, 7420 or 7430 filling the dovetail grooves of spline 7200. Due to the dissimilar expansion attributes (temperature and moisture) between plank 7100 and spline 7200, stresses are induced in adhesive layers 7410, 7420 and 7430. In the event that the adhesive bond between the adhesive layers and the plastic spline fails due to these stresses, there is still a mechanical connection by means of the dovetail groove(s).
[0249] Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly using a plastic spline without a lock, without an overiap guide (such as formed by the third flange 7240 of Figure 36), and with or without dovetail grooves, as shown in Figures 44A and 44B. Figures 44A and 44B show a two- piece siding plank assembly 7600 and siding system 7700, respectively. Plank 7610 is identical to plank 7100 of Figure 33 except that plank top surface 7105 (Figure 35) is not angled. Spline 7620 is identical to spline 7200 of Figure 33 except that third flange 7240 (Figure 36) is not extended to create the locking mechanism. Siding system 7700 is assembled as described in Figure 44B except that the gauge of the plank must be measured during the installation process. This embodiment will create a thick butt (deep shadow line) but does not provide a natural overiap guide for installation.
[0250] Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly using a plastic spline without a lock and with or without dovetail grooves as shown in Figures 45A and 45B. Figures 45A and 45B shows a two-piece siding plank assembly 7800 and siding system 7900, respectively. Plank 7810 is identical to plank 7610 of Figure 44A. Spline 7820 is similar to spline 7200 of Figure 33 except that fourth flange 7255 (Figure 36) is eliminated and third flange 7240 (Figure 36) is shortened and angled to about 90°. Siding system 7900 is assembled as described in Figure 45B. This embodiment will create a thick butt (deep shadow line) and provide a natural overlap guide for easy installation, but will not handle high wind loads.
[0251] Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece plank for a siding application using a natural wood or engineered wood siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline with or without a lock.
[0252] Figure 46 shows a flow chart 7950 of the method for making a two-piece plank assembly using an FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline that involves:
[0253] Manufacturing plank 7960: A plank is formed according to conventional Hatschek methods. The plank top and bottom edges are cut to an angle using angled water jet cutters during the conventional Hatschek manufacturing process. The plank is pre-cured then autoclaved as per conventional methods. See Table 5 for preferred ranges of plank dimensions.
[0254] Pre-treatment of plank & spline 7970: Plank 7100 and plastic spline 7200 (manufactured according to Table 6) are pre-cut to a desired and equal length. The surfaces of plastic spline 7200 are pre-treated in one of four ways to improve the adhesive bonding capabilities. The four methods of pre-treating the surfaces of the plastic spline are:
Sanding, using conventional power sanding tools;
Cleaning, using a solvent such as Isopropyl Alcohol;
Flame, expose to oxidizing flame fueled by propane gas for about 0.5 to 4 seconds;
A combination of the above.
[0255] Bonding plank & spline 7980: Plank 7100 is bonded to plastic spline 7200 to form the plank assembly 7400 shown in Figure 33. Plank 7100 is placed on a first conveyer traveling at a rate up to about 250 feet/minute and three beads of polymeric hot-melt adhesive are applied at a rate of about 1 gram/foot per bead along the length of the plank. The beads are formed so as to align with first flange top surface 7220, second flange front surface 7235, and fourth flange front surface 7260 of spline 7200 (Figure
37). Spline 7200 is placed on a second conveyer traveling at a rate up to 250 feet/minute. The first and second conveyers feed plank 7100 and spline 7200, respectively, to a common destination such that the spline aligns to the plank, makes contact with the adhesive, and is fed into a "nip" machine. The rollers of the nip machine are set to the desired overall plank assembly thickness and press plank 7100 and spline 7200 together. The nip machine then feeds the plank assembly 7400 to a press where about 2 to 10 psi of pressure is applied for about 3 to 5 seconds.
[0256] Finishing plank assembly 7990: Plank assembly 7400 is cut to a specified length and chamfer 7450 is applied (Figure 40) using conventional cutting or grinding tools.
B. Spline with Square Lock
[0257] The embodiments above using a "V" style lock system allow planks to be locked into one another without requiring extensive measurement to maintain gauge (the visible vertical distance between planks) and overiap (the vertical distance the plank overhangs the plank below) during installation. While the "V" style lock design has many inherent advantages, this design does not function satisfactorily for small variations in gauge that are sometimes desired by installers, especially when trying to level-out inaccuracies in framing and installation around window and door openings. As a result of being poorly fitted, the plank may subsequently experience lateral movement (flapping) when subjected to wind. Rather, a lock design that allows for small variations in gauge while preventing lateral movement (flapping) when subjected to wind would be beneficial.
[0258] Figure 47 shows an isometric view of the siding plank assembly of another embodiment of the present invention that solves these problems. Plank assembly 8400 includes a plank 8100 and a spline 8200. Plank 8100 is preferably a siding plank manufactured of medium-density FC material using the well- known Hatschek process. Further information regarding the manufacture of plank 8100 may be found in Australian Patent No. AU 515151.
[0259] Spline 8200 is preferably a "butt and lock" type spline made of rigid plastic formed by extrusion. Spline 8200 is aligned and is fixedly connected with an adhesive to plank 8100 (described in greater detail below). Figure 48 shows an isometric view of the FC siding plank of a preferred embodiment. Plank 8100 is a siding plank that includes a plank back surface 8120, a plank key 8125, a plank key back surface 8135, and a nailing region 8145. Plank 8100 has a length "I", a width V, and a height "h." An example of plank 8100 dimensions include "I" between about 12 and 16 feet, V between about 3/16 and 1/2 inches, and "h" between about 5 and 12 inches. A cross-sectional diagram of plank 8100 is shown in Figure 49.
[0260] Figure 49A is a cross-sectional diagram of plank 8100 taken along line 4949 of Figure 48. In this view, additional details of the plank 8100 are visible. Plank 8100 further includes a plank top surface 8105, a plank bottom surface 8110, a plank front surface 8115, a plank key front surface 8130, and a bevel edge 8140. Also shown is plank back surface 8120, plank key 8125, plank key back surface 8135, and nailing region 8145. [0261] Plank top surface 8105 is set at an angle "d" to plank key front surface 8130. Angle "d" of plank 8100 is cut using angled water jet cutters during the normal Hatschek manufacturing process. Plank 8100 has a key depth "a," a key height "b," and a nailing region "c."
[0262] Figure 49B is an exploded view of the plank top surface 8105 taken along line 49B-49B. In addition to being set at an angle "d" to the plank key front surface 8130, the plank top surface 8105 has a cant. The cant has a depth "e" from the plank key back surface 8135 and a height "f." Preferred dimensions and angles of plank 8100 are indicated in Table 7.
Table 7. Preferred Plank 8100 dimensions
Figure imgf000036_0001
[0263] Figure 50 shows an isometric view of the plastic locking spline of a preferred embodiment. Spline 8200 includes a plate 8205, a plate back surface 8210, a first flange 8215, a first flange top surface 8220, a second flange 8230, a third flange 8240, a fourth flange 8255, a fifth flange 8265, and a fifth flange back surface 8275. Spline 8200 has a length "I," a width "w," and a height "h."
[0264] Figure 51 is a cross-sectional diagram of spline 8200 taken along line 51-51 of Figure 50. In this view, additional details of the spline 8200 are visible. Spline 8200 further includes a plate front surface 8212, a first flange bottom surface 8225, a second flange front surface 8235, a third flange top surface 8245, a third flange bottom surface 8250, a fourth flange front surface 8260, and a fifth flange front surface 8270. Also shown is plate 8205, plate back surface 8210, first flange 8215, first flange top surface 8220, second flange 8230, third flange 8240, fourth flange 8255, fifth flange 8265, and fifth flange back surface 8275. All elements are present along the entire length of spline 8200 as shown in Figure 50.
[0265] A first edge of first flange 8215 is integrally connected orthogonal or at an angle to a first edge of plate 8205 extending from plate front surface 8212. A second edge of plate 8205 is integrally connected at an angle along third flange 8240 between the first and second edges of third flange 8240 extending from third flange bottom surface 8250. A first edge of fourth flange 8260 is integrally connected to a first edge of third flange 8240 in parallel with plate 8205 extending from third flange bottom surface 8250. A first edge of second flange 8230 is integrally connected orthogonal or at an angle along first flange 8215 between the first and second edges of first flange 8215 in parallel with plate 8205 extending from first flange top surface 8220. Second flange 8230 and fourth flange 8260 are coplanar. A first edge of fifth flange 8265 is integrally connected to a second edge of third flange 8240 in parallel with plate 8205 extending from third flange bottom surface 8250.
[0266] Figure 52 is an end view of spline 8200. Preferred dimensions and angles of spline 8200 are indicated in Table 8 below.
Table 8: Preferred Spline 8200 dimensions
Figure imgf000037_0001
[0267] Note: if h = e + f there is no gap. The gap is provided to save material and to eliminate the need for an extrusion mandrel to form the hollow, thereby simplifying the manufacturing process.
[0268] Figure 53 is a cross-sectional diagram of plank assembly 8400 of Figure 47. In this view, additional details of the plank assembly 8400 are visible. Plank assembly 8400 further includes a first adhesive layer 8410, a second adhesive layer 8420, and a third adhesive layer 8430. With continuing reference to Figure 53, the position of spline 8200 is shown in relation to plank 8100. First flange top surface 8220 is fixedly connected to plank bottom surface 8110 with first adhesive layer 8410. Second flange front surface 8235 is fixedly connected to plank back surface 8120 with second adhesive layer 8420. Fourth flange front surface 8260 is fixedly connected to plank back surface 8120 with third adhesive layer 8430.
[0269] Adhesive layers 8410, 8420 and 8430 are preferably fast setting, reactive hot-melt polyurethane such as H.B. Fuller 2570, H.B. Fuller 9570, or PURMELT R-382-22 with a viscosity of about 10,000 to 100,000 CPS at application temperatures ranging from about 200° to 350°F. The adhesion time preferably ranges from about 3 to 5 seconds. Figure 54 shows the same details as Figure 53 with the addition of a chamfer 8450. Chamfer 8450 is placed at an angle "ε" relative to plank front surface 8115 and may be flat or slightly rounded. Angle "ε" is in the range of about 15° to 85°. One example of angle "ε" is about 45".
[0270] With continuing reference to Figure 54, chamfer 8450 is accomplished by cutting or grinding plank 8100, first adhesive 8410 and spline 8200 such that the three elements are "blended". Chamfer 8450 creates a smooth and aesthetically pleasing drip-edge for plank assembly 8400, suitable for painting. As chamfer 8450 is exposed to the weather, first adhesive 8410 acts as a seal between plank 8100 and spline 8200, blocking wind and moisture.
[0271] Figure 55 shows a two-piece siding plank system of a preferred embodiment. Siding system 8500 includes a plank assembly 8400A and 8400B, a wall 8510, a wall outer surface 8515, and a nail 8520. Plank assembly 8400A includes a plank 8100A and a spline (that is not shown). Plank assembly 8400B includes a plank 8100B and a spline 8200B.
[0272] Using a blind nailing technique, plank assembly 8400A is fixedly connected to wall 8510 by driving nail 8520 through plank front surface 8115 of plank 8100 (Figure 54) in nailing region 8145 located just below the area of plank key 8125 (Figure 49A). Plate back surface 8210 (Figure 50) of spline 8200B is in contact with plank key front surface 8130 (Figure 49A) of plank 8100A. Fifth flange front surface 8270 (Figure 51) of spline 8200B is in contact with plank key back surface 8135 (Figure 48) of plank 8100A. A small gap in the range of about 0.0 to 0.125 inches is present between fifth flange back surface 8275 (Figure 51) of spline 8200B and wall outer surface 8515. Bevel edge 8140 (Figure 49A) of each plank assembly allows for easy installation of one plank assembly to another.
[0273] If plank assembly 8400A and 8400B of siding system 8500 is tightly fit, third flange bottom surface 8250 (Figure 51) of spline 8200B is in contact with plank top surface 8105 (Figure 49A) of plank 8100A. However, in the case where plank assembly 8400A and 8400B of siding system 8500 is loosely fit, third flange bottom surface 8250 (Figure 51) of spline 8200B is not in contact with plank top surface 8105 (Figure 49A) of plank 8100A leaving a gap "y" in the range preferably of about 0.0 to 0.25 inches. Gap "y" allows easy leveling of the plank assemblies during installation. In either a tightly or loosely fit siding system the plastic spline of the preferred embodiment prevents lateral movement of plank assembly 8400 when installed.
[0274] Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly with a plastic spline and square lock, wherein the plastic spline has one or more dovetail grooves in the second plate top surface and third plate front surface, with the grooves running along the length of the surfaces as described above in greater detail.
[0275] Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly with a plastic spline and square lock, wherein the plastic spline has a capillary break in the first plate back surface running along the length of the surface as described below in greater detail.
[0276] Another example of this embodiment is a two-piece siding plank assembly with a plastic spline and square lock, wherein the siding plank is made of any suitable material including but not limited to wood, engineered wood, or composite wood plastic.
[0277] Another example of this embodiment is a one-piece molded or extruded siding plank having a similar cross-sectional shape and providing the same functions as the two-piece siding plank assembly of the first embodiment. In this example, a one-piece siding plank is formed using conventional co- extrusion method or a variable composition fibrous cementitious structural product formed by co-extrusion.
[0278] Another example of this embodiment is a one-piece siding plank having a similar cross- sectional shape and providing the same functions as the two-piece siding plank assembly of the previous embodiment. In this embodiment a one-piece siding plank is formed using Applicant's skin and core technology, as described in pending U.S. Application Serial No. 09/973,844, filed October 9, 2001, the entirety of which is hereby incoφorated by reference.
[0279] Figure 56 shows a method for making a two-piece plank assembly using a FC siding plank bonded with an adhesive to a plastic spline, which involves:
[0280] Manufacturing plank 8960: A medium-density plank is prepared according to conventional Hatschek methods. Plank key 8125 and nailing region 8145 of plank 8100 (Figure 48) are formed by placing a sleeve of a profiled, offset thickness equal to key depth "a," on the size roller of the Hatschek machine for a distance equal to key height "b" and nailing region "c." As a result, the FC green sheet rides on the sleeve creating the offset of plank key 8125 and nailing region 8145. Alternately, plank key 8125 and nailing region 8145 are formed by profiled press-rollers, where about 200 to 500 psi of pressure is applied to shape these regions. The plank top and bottom edges are cut using angled water jet cutters during the conventional Hatschek manufacturing process. The plank is pre-cured then autoclaved as per conventional methods. See Table 7 above for acceptable ranges of plank dimensions for this embodiment.
[0281] Pre-treatment of plank & spline 8970: Plank 8100 and spline 8200 (manufactured as per Table 8) are pre-cut to a desired and equal length as shown in Figure 49A and 50, respectively. The surfaces of plastic spline 8200 (i.e. first flange top surface 8220, second flange front surface 8235, and fourth flange front surface 8260) are pre-treated in one of four ways to improve the adhesive bonding capabilities. The four methods of pre-treating the surfaces of the plastic spline are:
1. Sanding, using conventional power sanding tools to roughen the surface;
2. Cleaning, using a solvent such as Isopropyl Alcohol;
3. Flame, expose to oxidizing flame fueled by propane gas for about 0.5 to 4 seconds;
4. A combination of the above.
[0282] Bonding plank & spline 8980: Plank 8100 is bonded to plastic spline 8200 to form the plank assembly 8400 shown in Figure 47. Plank 8100 is placed on a first conveyer traveling at a rate up to 250 feet/minute and three beads of polymeric hot-melt adhesive with a viscosity of about 10,000 to 100,000 CPS at application temperatures ranging from about 200° to 350°F are applied at a rate of about 1 gram/foot per bead along the length of the plank. The beads are formed so as to align with first flange top surface 8220, second flange front surface 8235, and fourth flange front surface 8260 of spline 8200 (Figure 51). Likewise, spline
8200 is placed on a second conveyer traveling at a rate equal to the first conveyor. The first and second conveyers feed plank 8100 and spline 8200, respectively, to a common destination such that the spline 8200 aligns to plank 8100, makes contact with the adhesive and is fed into a "nip" machine. The rollers of the nip machine are set to the desired overall plank assembly thickness and press plank 8100 and spline 8200 together. The nip machine then feeds the plank assembly 8400 to a press where about 10 to 100 psi of pressure is applied for about 3 to 5 seconds.
[0283] Finishing plank assembly 8990: Plank assembly 8400 is cut to a specified length and chamfer 8450 is applied (Figure 54) using conventional cutting or grinding tools.
[0284] Advantageously, the siding plank assembly of this embodiment allows for small variations in the siding installed while reducing lateral movement (flapping) when subjected to wind. The assembly also allows for leveling of the planks during installation and can be formed without machining the lock and key. The locking system allows for easy installation and the plank top surface angle does not need to match the spline fourth plate angle.
C. Apparatus for Reducing Capillary Action Between Planks
[0285] In another embodiment, an apparatus for reducing capillary action is provided in the overiap region between two medium-density FC or other siding assemblies when installed. One example is a plastic spline having a capillary break formed by adding a lip along the length of the spline as described below.
[0286] Conventional exterior siding systems also include a "rain screen," which is the combination of an airtight and watertight barrier placed over the exterior surface of the frame to be sided, combined with the siding. The functional puφose of the siding is to keep moisture away from the rain screen inner barrier surface. The siding of FC material, wood or vinyl rain screen is a series of horizontal "planks" which overiap at their upper edges to prevent wind and rain from penetrating to the interior of the rain screen. The rain screen siding system, if properly installed, is very effective at keeping the framing and insulation of the wall dry and airtight under all weather conditions.
[0287] When siding planks are installed on an exterior wall of a building, moisture can find its way into the tight space where adjacent siding planks overlap. While most moisture does not enter because of gravity, the width of the gap in the overiap region is usually small enough that capillary action can occur, allowing moisture to penetrate to the internal barrier of the rain screen or at least into the space between the exterior barrier and the siding planks. As a result, the lapped siding material is not completely effective as a water barrier.
[0288] While increasing the gap between the siding materials when installed reduces the effect of capillary action, the siding becomes more susceptible to wind driven moisture penetration. Therefore, a siding assembly when installed that prevents water penetration due to rain and capillary action while preventing wind driven penetration would be beneficial. What is needed is a design of lap siding that forms a capillary break to stop the rise of water between the two surfaces in the plank overiap region.
[0289] Advantageously, the siding plank assembly of this embodiment reduces capillary action in the siding, thus providing additional moisture protection to the exterior barrier wall and siding interior while maintaining good resistance to wind driven moisture penetration. Furthermore, the assembly keeps the region that is nailed relatively dry, which increases the strength of fiber cement and therefore resistance to dislodgment of the planks by high winds. Another way to solve the problem is to seal the space between the planks with caulk or other type of sealant. However, this adds complexity to the exterior wall system. Altematively, a gap or groove the length of the plank can be machined in the overlap area. However, this would create a weak point in the plank and would add a manufacturing process step.
[0290] Figure 57 shows an isometric view of the siding plank assembly comprising a two-piece plank having a plastic spline with an angled lock as described above. Plank assembly 9400 includes a plank 9100 and a spline 9200. Plank 9100 is preferably a siding plank manufactured of medium-density FC material using a well-known Hatschek process. Spline 9200 is a "butt and lock" type spline manufactured of rigid plastic using a well-known extrusion process described above. Spline 9200 is aligned and is fixedly connected with an adhesive to plank 9100 as described above. As shown in Figure 57, spline 9200 of this embodiment further includes a capillary break 9265 running along the length of spline 9200.
[0291] Figure 58 shows an isometric view of the plastic spline with the capillary break of the preferred embodiment. Spline 9200 includes a plate 9205, a plate back surface 9210, a first flange 9215, a second flange 9230, a third flange 9240, and a fourth flange 9255. Also shown is capillary break 9265 in the form of a lip running along the length of plate back surface 9210 along the lower edge.
[0292] Spline 9200 has a length "I", a width V, and a height "h". An example of spline 9200 dimensions include "I" between about 12 and 16 feet, "w" between about 3/8 and 3/4 inches, and "h" between about 1/2 and 2 inches. A cross-sectional diagram and an end view of spline 9200 are shown in Figures 59 and 60, respectively.
[0293] Figure 59 is a cross-sectional diagram of spline 9200 taken along line 59-59 of Figure 58. Spline 9200 further includes a third flange bottom surface 9250. Also shown is plate 9205, plate back surface 9210, first flange 9215, second flange 9230, third flange 9240, fourth flange 9255, and capillary break 9265.
[0294] A first edge of first flange 9215 is integrally connected at an angle to a first edge of elongated plate 9205. A second edge of elongated plate 9205 is integrally connected at an angle along third flange 9240 between the first and second edges of third flange 9240. A first edge of fourth flange 9255 is integrally connected to a second edge of third flange 9240 in parallel with plate 9205. A first edge of second flange 9230 is integrally connected along first flange 9215 between the first and second edges of first flange 9215 in parallel with plate 9205. Second flange 9230 and fourth flange 9255 are coplanar. Furthermore, material is added such that the first edge of first flange 9215 is extended and is not coplanar with plate back surface 9210, thus forming capillary break 9265.
[0295] Figure 60 is an end view of spline 9200 showing approximate dimensions. Preferred dimensions and angles of spline 9200 are indicated in Table 9 below. Table 9: Preferred Spline 9200 dimensions
Figure imgf000042_0001
Note: if h = d + e there is no gap. The gap is provided to save material.
[0296] Figure 61 shows a two-piece siding plank system as described above. Siding system 9500 includes plank assemblies 9400A and 9400B. Plank assembly 9400B is positioned in contact with plank assembly 9400A. More specifically, third flange bottom surface 9250 (Figure 59) contacts the top of plank assembly 9400A and capillary break 9265 is in contact with plank front surface 9115 of plank assembly 9400A. The result is a gap located above capillary break 9265 between plate back surface 9210 of plank assembly 9400B and plank front surface 9115 of plank assembly 9400A. The resulting gap is equal to dimension "f of spline 9200 running along the length of siding system 9500.
[0297] Capillary break 9265 of this embodiment provides a gap equal to dimension T of spline 9200 preventing capillary action between plank assemblies 9400A and 9400B. At the same time, capillary break 9265 of a preferred embodiment maintains a wind barrier between plank assemblies 9400A and 9400B, as capillary break 9265 is in direct contact to plank front surface 9115, and third flange bottom surface 9250 (Figure 59) contacts the top of plank assembly 9400A.
[0298] Another example of this embodiment, shown in Figure 62, is a plastic spline having a capillary break formed by adding a groove along the length of the spline as described below. As this spline is extruded, the wall thickness is kept constant, and the capillary break is formed by a semicircular indentation in the back surface of the plate and a semicircular protrusion in the front surface of the plate.
[0299] Figure 62 shows an isometric view of the plastic spline with capillary break of this embodiment. Spline 9300 includes a plate 9305, a plate back surface 9310, a first flange 9315, a second flange 9330, a third flange 9340, and a fourth flange 9355. Also shown is capillary break 9365 in the form of a groove running along the length of plate back surface 9310. Spline 9300 has a length "I", a width "w", and a height "h". An example of spline 9300 dimensions include "I" between about 12 and 16 feet, "w" between about 3/8 and 3/4 inches, and "h" between about 1/2 and 2 inches. A cross-sectional diagram and an end view of spline 9300 are shown in Figures 63 and 64, respectively. [0300] Figure 63 is a cross-sectional diagram of spline 9300 taken along line 63-63 of Figure 62. Spline 9300 further includes a third flange bottom surface 9350 and a plate front surface 9370. Also shown is plate 9305, plate back surface 9310, first flange 9315, second flange 9330, third flange 9340, fourth flange 9355 and capillary break 9365. First edge of first flange 9315 is integrally connected at an angle to a first edge of elongated plate 9305. A second edge of elongated plate 9305 is integrally connected at an angle along third flange 9340 between the first and second edges of third flange 9340. A first edge of fourth flange 9360 is integrally connected to a second edge of third flange 9340 in parallel with plate 9305. A first edge of second flange 9330 is integrally connected along first flange 9315 between the first and second edges of first flange 9315 in parallel with plate 9305. Second flange 9330 and fourth flange 9360 are coplanar. Along the length of plate 9305, between the first and second edge of plate 9305, material is indented in a semicircular fashion along the length of plate back surface 9310 and material is similarly protruding along the length of plate front surface 9370, thus forming capillary break 9365.
[0301] Figure 64 is an end view of spline 9300. Preferred dimensions and angles of spline 9300 are indicated in Table 10 below.
Table 10: Preferred Spline 9300 dimensions
Figure imgf000043_0001
[0302] Figure 65 shows a two-piece siding plank system of a preferred embodiment. Siding system 9600 includes plank assemblies 9400C and 9400D. Plank assembly 9400D is positioned in contact with plank assembly 9400C. More specifically, third flange bottom surface 9350 (Figure 63) contacts the top of plank assembly 9400C and plate back surface 9310 (Figure 63) is in contact with plank front surface 9115 (Figure 61) of plank assembly 9400C. The result is a gap created by the presence of capillary break 9365 between plate back surface 9310 of plank assembly 9400D and plank front surface 9115 of plank assembly 9400C. The resulting gap running along the length of siding system 9600 has a depth substantially equal to dimension T of spline 9300 and a width substantially equal to dimension "g" of spline 9300. [0303] Capillary break 9365 of this embodiment provides a gap equal to dimension T of spline 9300 preventing capillary action between plank assemblies 9400C and 9400D. At the same time, capillary break 9365 of the present invention maintains a wind barrier between plank assemblies 9400C and 9400D, as plate back surface 9310 is in direct contact to plank front surface 9115. VI. FIBER CEMENT ARTICLES WITH LOCALIZED REINFORCEMENT AND A METHOD FOR
MAKING SAME
[0304] In additional embodiments, fiber cement articles having localized reinforcements are provided, which is designed in one embodiment for use in combination with a system of FC planks for siding applications. The result is a locally reinforced FC plank assembly having fiber cement articles with localized reinforcements for improving the strength of individual FC siding planks.
[0305] Advantageously, the siding plank assembly of these embodiments provide a lightweight siding assembly having a reduced amount of FC material without compromising the strength of the plank. The addition of localized reinforcement provides for a low-cost siding assembly with increased stiffness and strength, which reduces breakage and improves handleability and ease of installation. The siding assembly is also suitable for blind nailing and capable of high wind loads.
[0306] Figure 66 shows a cross-sectional view of a reinforced fiber cement article 10000, which includes a fiber cement article 11000, a reinforcing fixture 13000, and a high-shear adhesive layer 12000 that is situated between fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000. High-shear adhesive layer 12000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 can be applied to one or both faces of fiber cement article 11000.
[0307] Fiber cement article 11000 may be made in accordance with the methods described in Australian patent AU 515151, "Fiber Reinforced Cementitious Articles" and in U.S. Patent No. 6,346,146, the entirety of each of which is hereby incoφorated by reference. However, it will be appreciated that fiber cement articles manufactured by other means, including but not limited to the Hatschek process, Bison process, filter pressing, flow-on process, Mazza process, Magnani process, roll-forming, or extrusion, can be used in this embodiment.
[0308] High-shear adhesive layer 12000 is preferably an adhesive with high-shear strength, good alkali resistance, durability in exterior cladding applications and quick setting capabilities. The adhesive also preferably has sufficient working or "open" time to allow sufficient penetration into the fiber cement substrate. The adhesive also preferably maintains its adhesive properties through exposure to many cycles of heat and cold and/or wet and dry. One method of evaluating the suitability of such adhesive is to conduct a "peel test", well known in the art, in which the percent retention of peel strength is measured after several exposures to wet and dry and/or heat and cold. Preferably, durable high-shear strength adhesives are used, for instance: hot melt polyurethane adhesives such as Henckel Puremelt 243; hot melt polyamide adhesives such as Henckel - Micromelt 6239, 6238, and 6211; and hot melt modified ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) adhesives such as Reicholdt 2H850. [0309] The preferred options listed above for the high-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 have the additional property of resisting adhesive failure after five wet/dry cycles of soaking in saturated CaO (alkaline) solution at 60 °F or after twenty-five soak/freeze/thaw cycles.
[0310] Reinforcing fixture 13000 is preferably made from any common engineering material, preferably with a tensile strength substantially greater than that of fiber cement article 11000. More preferably, the reinforcing fixture is made of a non-rigid material. Preferred materials for reinforcing fixture 13000 including, but not limited to, metal foils, woven metal meshes, and expanded metal meshes of sufficient shape and dimension to be suitable for the application. Other materials of relatively high tensile strength, such as polymer films or woven and non-woven polymer fabric meshes may also be used.
[0311] As shown in Figure 66, both durable high-shear adhesive layer 12000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 are placed on one face of fiber cement article 110000 and centered along the length and width of fiber cement article 11000. When handling reinforced fiber cement article 10000, tensile stresses created by flexing fiber cement article 11000 are transferred to reinforcing fixture 13000 via high-shear adhesive layer 12000.
[0312] Reinforcing fixture 13000 can be applied to both faces of fiber cement article 11000 or can be applied to more than one area of fiber cement article 11000 with high-shear adhesive layer 12000 in order to accommodate stresses envisioned in the use and application of fiber cement article 11000.
[0313] Reinforcing fixture 13000 and durable high-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 may be applied to fiber cement shapes other than flat planks, including, but not limited to, panels, roofing shakes or shingles, tiles, slate, thick boards, and hollow or solid extruded profiles, in order to provide reinforcement in critical areas. Thus, it will be appreciated that the reinforcing fixtures described herein are not limited to siding planks.
[0314] While reinforcing fixture 13000 is illustrated in Figure 66 as a flat sheet, reinforcing fixture 13000 may also have any three-dimensional shape required to provide sufficient reinforcement to specific areas of fiber cement article 11000 when attached to fiber cement article 11000 with durable high- shear adhesive 12000. The dimensions and shape of reinforcing fixture 13000 may be determined by analyzing the stresses in fiber cement article 11000 under specific conditions of load using any number of methods known to the art, including finite element analysis.
[0315] One means of evaluating the relative stiffness of reinforced fiber cement article 10000 is the "barrel test," which measures the ability of a plank to be self-supporting when carried parallel to the ground. In the barrel test, a plank is balanced flat upon the circumference of a barrel placed parallel to the ground. If the plank does not break after a predetermined amount of time, the amount of deflection from horizontal is measured in order to compare the relative stiffness of various plank designs and materials. Table 11 illustrates the relative performance in the barrel test of fiber cement planks made according to the embodiments described herein. Table 11 Deflection and breaking behavior of FC planks in the barrel test
Figure imgf000046_0001
[0316] Figures 67, 68, and 69 below illustrate examples of fiber cement building products incoφorating reinforced fiber cement article 10000.
[0317] Figure 67 shows a front perspective view of a reinforced fiber cement plank with nailing skirt 20000, including fiber cement article 11000, high-shear adhesive layer 12000, and a metal or plastic nailing skirt 23000. Nailing skirt 23000 functions as reinforcing fixture 13000 in this application and is preferably attached to fiber cement article 11000 in the manner described above with reference to reinforcing fixture 13000. Nailing skirt 23000 serves as a nailing area for attaching fiber cement article 11000 to the exterior of a building and is of sufficient thickness to support fiber cement article 11000 when so attached. Nailing through nailing skirt 23000 reduces the amount of overiap required between siding planks. The stiffness of nailing skirt 23000 also provides resistance to wind uplift when the plank is blind nailed.
[0318] Figure 68 shows a rear perspective view of a reinforced fiber cement plank with extruded polymer reinforcing strip 30000, including fiber cement article 11000, high-shear adhesive layer 12000, and a three-dimensional reinforcing fixture 33000. Three-dimensional reinforcing fixture 33000 functions as reinforcing fixture 13000 in this application and is attached to fiber cement article 11000 in the manner described above with reference to reinforcing fixture 13000. Three-dimensional reinforcing fixture 33000 functions both to stiffen the plank and as a spacer between planks when several planks are installed on a wall. By providing the function of a spacer, the reinforcing fixture 33000 provides an aesthetically pleasing shadow line when several planks are installed on the wall.
[0319] Figure 69 shows a rear perspective view of a multi-lap fiber cement plank 40000, including two or more fiber cement articles 11000 joined in an overlapping fashion and bonded together with high-shear adhesive layer 12000.
[0320] Figure 70 shows a method 50000 for making a fiber cement article with a localized reinforcing fixture, which involves:
[0321] Designing reinforcing fixture 51000: Analyze the stresses on the fiber cement article in its intended use to determine the shape, dimension, and appropriate material for the reinforcing fixture. The analysis and design is performed using methods well known in the art, such as classical bending moment analysis or finite element analysis.
[0322] Fabricating reinforcing fixture 52000: Fabricate the reinforcing fixture 13000 using well- known methods appropriate for the design and material generated in step 51000. For example, if reinforcing fixture 13000 were a metal foil of specific shape, a die would be fabricated using well-known methods to mechanically stamp the shape from a roll of aluminum foil of a specific thickness.
[0323] Applying adhesive to article surface 53000: Form a high-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 of a predetermined thickness by applying a predetermined amount of durable, high-shear strength adhesive to a predetermined location on the surface of fiber cement article 11000. High-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 is preferably applied at a temperature in the range of about 200° F to 400° F such that the viscosity of the adhesive allows sufficient penetration into the fiber cement surface at the application temperature. The durable, high-shear strength adhesive should ideally allow between about 30 and 60 seconds of working (open) time before setting. The adhesive can be applied using any type of commonly used hot melt application equipment, such as a roll coater, curtain coater, or hot glue gun.
[0324] Applying adhesive to reinforcing fixture surface 54000: Form a high-shear strength adhesive layer 12000 of a predetermined thickness (when required to ensure adequate bonding between fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000) by applying a predetermined amount of durable, high- shear strength adhesive to a predetermined location on the surface of reinforcing fixture 13000. The adhesive is preferably applied at a temperature in the range of about 200° F to 400° F such that the viscosity of the adhesive allows it to penetrate into fiber cement article 11000 at the application temperature. The durable, high-shear strength adhesive should ideally allow between about 30 and 60 seconds of working (open) time before setting. The adhesive can be applied using any type of commonly used hot melt application equipment, such as a roll coater, curtain coater, or hot glue gun.
[0325] Attaching reinforcing fixture to article surface 55000: Attach a reinforcing fixture 13000 to a fiber cement article 11000 manually or by mechanical means, such that the point of attachment is high- shear adhesive layer 12000 applied in steps 53000 and/or 54000.
[0326] Applying pressure to reinforcing fixture and article 56000: Apply a uniform pressure to fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 in order to bond reinforcing fixture 13000 to fiber cement article 11000. In the example of reinforced fiber cement plank with nailing skirt 20000, pressure is applied by passing fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 simultaneously through the nip of a pressurized roller such that the roller uniformly exerts three pounds per linear inch (25 pounds across a 8.25 inch plank width). Other mechanical means may be used to apply pressure to assemblies of more complicated shapes.
[0327] Setting adhesive 57000: Hold fiber cement article 11000 and reinforcing fixture 13000 in place for a predetermined amount of time, pressure, and temperature in order to permanently bond them together. The pressure, time, and temperature required are dictated by the properties of the high-shear adhesive used and line speed of the manufacturing process. In the example of reinforced fiber cement plank with nailing skirt 20000, hot-melt polyurethane adhesive is applied at 250° F, the components are assembled within 60 seconds, and the plank is instantaneously pressed using a pressurized nip roll.
[0328] Removing fiber cement article from press 58000: Remove finished reinforced fiber cement article 10000 from the press using manual or mechanical means.
[0329] The embodiments for localized reinforcement described above advantageously improve the handleability of thin fiber cement planks or other articles by allowing a thin, lightweight plank or article to have the same stiffness as a much thicker, denser plank or article. By using localized reinforcements durably bonded to specific portions of a fiber cement article, the stiffness, bending strength, and /or impact strength of the fiber cement article may be improved, allowing such articles to be used in applications previously unsuitable for fiber cement due to its brittleness. Fiber cement siding planks formed as described above are capable of handling high wind loads when blind nailed, and provide a way to minimize the amount of overlap between fiber cement planks while maintaining a secure attachment. Articles made according to the methods described above also have greater resistance to adhesive failure after exposure to wet/dry cycles, attack by alkaline solutions, or soak/freeze/thaw cycling. Additionally, by using localized reinforcements durably bonded to specific portions of a fiber article, such articles may be designed for a given application using less fiber cement material and/or fiber cement material of a lower density. In the embodiment above using a foil-backed fiber cement planks, such planks are capable of reflecting heat from a building, which keeps the building cooler in hot weather.
[0330] In another embodiment, the problem of providing localized reinforcement to fiber cement articles can be solved by embedding the reinforcing fixture within the fiber cement article while the fiber cement article is in the green or plastic state. Preferably, the reinforcing fixture should be chosen to withstand the high temperature of the curing process of the fiber cement article so as not to lose their effectiveness. Conclusions
[0331] Certain preferred embodiments of the present invention provide efficient designs for lightweight fiber cement siding plank assemblies having the traditional deep shadow-line. Particularly, the deep shadow line is created without having to machine the siding plank or otherwise remove any siding plank material. Instead, the siding plank is formed by adding material to a thinner starting base siding plank instead of removing material from a thick rectangular section as shown in prior art. Additionally, two pieces of FC material can be bonded solidly and quickly using the adhesive composition of the preferred embodiments. As such, thin and lightweight planks can be used as siding material that produces a thick shadow line.
[0332] Furthermore, the siding plank assembly of certain preferred embodiments provide interiocking features that allow the planks to be installed quickly with ease and maintain a constant gauge of plank rows along the length of the siding and between rows of sidings. The siding plank assembly also provides the installation flexibility of variable gauge height. The siding plank assemblies use gravity to help mate two planks tightly and uniformly without face nailing.
[0333] Additionally, certain preferred embodiments of the present invention provide for improved handleability and strength of thin fiber cement planks by allowing a thin, lightweight plank to have the same stiffness as a much thinker, denser plank. This is preferably accomplished by reinforcing specific portions of a fiber cement article with reinforcing fixtures. A locally reinforced article has the advantages of producing a low cost article that handles well during installation and under wind loads. The reinforced article also provides a way to minimize the amount of overlap between fiber cement planks while maintaining a secure attachment as well as a way to reflect heat.
[0334] Although the foregoing invention has been described in terms of certain preferred embodiments, other embodiments will become apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art, in view of the disclosure herein. Accordingly, the present invention is not intended to be limited by the recitation of preferred embodiments, but is instead intended to be defined solely by reference to the appended claims.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A siding plank, comprising: a main plank section comprising fiber cement having a length, a width and a thickness, the main plank section having a front surface and a back surface, a top surface and an bottom surface, and a upper end and a lower end; and a second piece adhered to the main plank section, the second piece having a length, a width, a thickness, a front surface, a back surface, an upper surface, and a lower surface; wherein at least a portion of the front surface of the second piece is adhered along the back surface of the main plank section adjacent the lower end of the main plank section.
2. The siding plank of Claim 1, wherein the second piece is adhered to the main plank section such that the back surface of the main plank section is parallel with the front surface of the second piece.
3. The siding plank of Claim 1 , wherein the upper surface of the second piece forms an obtuse angle with the back surface of the main plank section when the second piece is adhered to the main plank section.
4. The siding plank of Claim 1, wherein the upper surface of the second piece is peφendicular to the back surface of the main plank section when the second piece is adhered to the main plank section.
5. The siding plank of Claim 1, wherein the second piece further includes a surface extending rearwardly from the back surface of the second piece adapted to engage a top portion of a separate siding plank.
6. The siding plank of Claim 5, wherein the surface forms an acute angle with the back surface of the second piece.
7. The siding plank of Claim 5, wherein the surface is peφendicular to the back surface of the second piece.
8. The siding plank of Claim 1 , wherein the bottom surface of the second piece is in the same plane as with the bottom surface of the main plank section.
9. The siding plank of Claim 1, wherein the bottom surface of the second piece comprises a flange which extends forwardly away from the front surface of the second piece.
10. The siding plank of Claim 9, wherein the bottom surface of the main plank section is adhered to the flange.
11. The siding plank of Claim 1, wherein the second piece and the main plank section are adhered using a cementitious adhesive.
12. The siding plank of Claim 1, wherein the second piece and the main plank section are adhered using a reactive hot-melt polyurethane adhesive.
13. The siding plank of Claim 1 , wherein the second piece is a fiber cement butt piece.
14. The siding plank of Claim 1 , wherein the second piece is a plastic spline.
15. The siding plank of Claim 1 , wherein the second piece and the main plank section are of two separate and distinct materials.
16. The siding plank of Claim 1 , wherein the second piece has a capillary break.
17. The siding plank of Claim 1, wherein the main plank section has a fixing indicator for insuring proper placement of a fixing device within a predetermined fixing region.
18. The siding plank of Claim 17, wherein the fixing indicator is a depression along the length of the main plank section near upper end of the front surface of the main plank.
19. The siding plank of Claim 17, wherein the main plank section has a hollow beneath the fixing indicator to ease placement of a fixing device through the main plank section.
20. A fiber cement siding plank for creating a deep shadow line, comprising: a main plank section comprising fiber cement having a length, a width and a thickness, the main plank section having a front surface and a back surface, a top surface and a bottom surface, and a upper end and a lower end; and a second piece comprising fiber cement adhered to the main plank section, the second piece having a length, a width, a thickness, a front surface, a back surface, an upper surface, and a lower surface; wherein at least a portion the front surface of the second piece is adhered along the back surface of the main plank section adjacent the lower end of the main plank section.
21. A siding plank for creating a deep shadow line, comprising: a main plank section comprising fiber cement having a length, a width and a thickness, the main plank section having a front surface and a back surface, a top surface and an bottom surface, and a upper end and a lower end; and a spline adhered to the main plank section, the spline having a length, a width, a thickness, a front surface, a back surface, an upper surface, and a lower surface; wherein at least a portion the front surface of the spline is adhered along the back surface of the main plank section adjacent the lower end of the main plank section.
22. A siding plank, comprising: a main plank section comprising fiber cement having an front surface and a back surface; an interiocking member having a flat engaging surface adhered to the back surface of the main plank section allowing the siding plank to be lowered and stacked over an adjacent siding plank.
23. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the interlocking member comprises a locking region adapted to match a key tip of an adjacent plank.
24. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the interiocking member is a butt piece.
25. The siding plank of Claim 24, wherein the butt piece comprises a locking region adapted to match a key tip of an adjacent plank.
26. The siding plank of Claim 24, wherein the butt piece is made of fiber cement.
27. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the interlocking member is a spline.
28. The siding plank of Claim 27, wherein the spline is made of plastic.
29. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the fiber cement has a density of about 1.2 g/cm3 or less.
30. The siding plank of Claim 23, wherein the locking region includes a pair of surfaces forming an acute angle relative to one another.
31. The siding plank of Claim 30, wherein the angle is between about 30 and 85 degrees.
32. The siding plank of Claim 30, wherein the key tip of the adjacent plank has a pair of surfaces forming an angle substantially equivalent to the angle of the locking region.
33. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the interlocking member has a V-shaped lock.
34. The siding plank of Claim 33, wherein the V-shaped lock comprises a lock inner angled surface, a lock inner surface, and a lock inner blunted surface.
35. The siding plank of Claim 33, wherein the V-shaped lock comprises at least one compressible region that allows the plank to be easily interlock with an adjacent plank during installation and provides lateral compensation for non-planar mounting surfaces.
36. The siding plank of Claim 35, wherein the compressible region is made of a rubber material.
37. The siding plank of Claim 35, wherein a first compressible region is located on the lock inner angled surface and a second compressible region is located on the lock inner surface.
38. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the interlocking member is adhered to the siding plank with an adhesive.
39. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the interlocking member comprises a square lock.
40. The siding plank of Claim 39, wherein the square lock is configured to fit over an upper edge of an adjacent plank in a manner such that a small gap is maintained between the lock and the upper edge of an adjacent plank in a manner such that a small gap is maintained between the lock and the upper edge to accommodate variable gauge height.
41. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the interlocking member further comprises an overiap guide.
42. The siding plank of Claim 22, wherein the interlocking member has at least one dovetail groove.
- 43. A method of manufacturing a siding plank, comprising: providing a board having a front surface, a back surface, a top end and a bottom end; providing a second piece having a front surface and a back surface, a top end and a bottom end; aligning the bottom end of the board with the bottom end of the second piece with the front surface of the second piece facing the back surface of the board; and bonding the front surface of the second piece to the back surface of the board to form a two- piece plank.
44. The method of Claim 43, wherein bonding the board to the second piece comprises bonding the plank to the second piece using a cementitious adhesive.
45. The method of Claim 43, wherein bonding the board to the second piece comprises bonding the plank to the second piece using a hot-melt polyurethane adhesive.
46. The method of Claim 43, wherein the board and second piece are pressed together using rollers.
47. The method of Claim 43, wherein the board and the second piece are both made from fiber cement.
48. The method of Claim 43, further comprising autoclaving both the board and the second piece after they are bonded together.
49. The method of Claim 43, further comprising pre-curing the board and the second piece for a predetermined period of time.
50. The method of Claim 48, comprising autoclaving the board and the second piece at a temperature between approximately 350 to 400 degrees F at about 120 to 145 psi for a period of approximately 8 hours.
51. The method of Claim 48, further comprising trimming the plank assembly to remove overflow of the adhesive from the autoclaved plank assembly.
52. The method of Claim 43, wherein the second piece is a fiber cement butt piece.
53. The method of Claim 43, wherein the second piece is a plastic spline.
54. The method of Claim 43, wherein the second piece includes a locking area.
55. The method of Claim 54, further comprising attaching compressible regions to surfaces of the locking area.
56. The method of Claim 43, further comprising bonding a portion of the second piece along the bottom end of the board.
57. The method of Claim 43, wherein the second piece includes dovetail grooves to improve the adhesion between the board and the second piece.
58. The method of Claim 43, wherein the board is a fiber cement board formed by a Hatschek method.
59. The method of Claim 43, further comprising pre-treating the second piece to improve the adhesive bonding capability of the second piece.
60. The method of Claim 59, wherein pre-treating the second piece comprises sanding the second piece.
61. The method of Claim 59, wherein pre-treating the second piece comprises cleaning the second piece.
62. The method of Claim 59, wherein pre-treating the second piece comprises exposing the second piece to flame.
63. The method of Claim 43, further comprising machining a locking region into the siding plank.
64. The method of Claim 63, further comprising machining a locking region into the siding plank.
PCT/US2002/010610 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing WO2002081840A1 (en)

Priority Applications (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
NZ528776A NZ528776A (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing
BR0208620-4A BR0208620A (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece outer wall board, production and installation processes
AU2002248752A AU2002248752B2 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing
KR1020037013034A KR100853733B1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing
JP2002579591A JP4020384B2 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Manufacturing and installing fiber cement paneling
EP02717770A EP1377716A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing
MXPA03009031A MXPA03009031A (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing.
CA002443158A CA2443158A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US28119501P 2001-04-03 2001-04-03
US60/281,195 2001-04-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2002081840A1 true WO2002081840A1 (en) 2002-10-17

Family

ID=23076341

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2002/010760 WO2002081841A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Fiber cement siding planks, methods of making and installing
PCT/US2002/010609 WO2002081842A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Reinforced fiber cement article, methods of making and installing
PCT/US2002/010608 WO2002081839A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Spline for siding planks, methods of making and installing
PCT/US2002/010610 WO2002081840A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2002/010760 WO2002081841A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Fiber cement siding planks, methods of making and installing
PCT/US2002/010609 WO2002081842A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Reinforced fiber cement article, methods of making and installing
PCT/US2002/010608 WO2002081839A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-04-03 Spline for siding planks, methods of making and installing

Country Status (14)

Country Link
US (4) US20030056458A1 (en)
EP (4) EP1377716A1 (en)
JP (4) JP4020384B2 (en)
KR (3) KR100853733B1 (en)
CN (3) CN100354490C (en)
AR (4) AR033111A1 (en)
AU (6) AU2002248751B2 (en)
BR (3) BR0208620A (en)
CA (4) CA2443348C (en)
CZ (1) CZ20032808A3 (en)
MX (4) MXPA03009030A (en)
NZ (4) NZ528777A (en)
PL (1) PL364456A1 (en)
WO (4) WO2002081841A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7993570B2 (en) 2002-10-07 2011-08-09 James Hardie Technology Limited Durable medium-density fibre cement composite
US8993462B2 (en) 2006-04-12 2015-03-31 James Hardie Technology Limited Surface sealed reinforced building element
US9624675B2 (en) 2013-01-27 2017-04-18 Fiber Cement Foam Systems Insulation, LLC Method and device to attach building siding boards

Families Citing this family (100)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6539643B1 (en) * 2000-02-28 2003-04-01 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Surface groove system for building sheets
US7984597B2 (en) 2000-11-20 2011-07-26 Exterior Portfolio, Llc Vinyl siding
WO2002081841A1 (en) * 2001-04-03 2002-10-17 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Fiber cement siding planks, methods of making and installing
US20050235598A1 (en) * 2001-10-23 2005-10-27 Andrew Liggins Wall construction method
CN100377869C (en) * 2001-11-28 2008-04-02 詹姆斯哈迪国际财金公司 Trough-edge building panel and method of manufacture
US8281535B2 (en) 2002-07-16 2012-10-09 James Hardie Technology Limited Packaging prefinished fiber cement articles
JP4406360B2 (en) 2002-07-16 2010-01-27 ジェイムズ ハーディー インターナショナル ファイナンス ベスローテン フェンノートシャップ Packaging of prefinished fiber cement products
AU2002953172A0 (en) * 2002-12-04 2002-12-19 Grant Charlwood A Cladding Element
US7089709B2 (en) * 2002-12-04 2006-08-15 Shear Tech, Inc. Siding having indicia defining a fastening zone
SE526691C2 (en) * 2003-03-18 2005-10-25 Pergo Europ Ab Panel joint with friction raising means at longitudinal side joint
ES2328360T3 (en) * 2003-05-19 2009-11-12 James Hardie International Finance B.V. BUILDING STRUCTURE.
CN101089324A (en) * 2003-06-20 2007-12-19 詹姆斯哈迪国际财金公司 Durable building article and method of making same
US7726092B1 (en) 2003-10-09 2010-06-01 The Crane Group Companies Limited Window sill and trim corner assembly
CA2484792C (en) * 2003-10-15 2009-12-08 Progressive Foam Technologies, Inc. Drainage plane for exterior wall product
US7934352B1 (en) 2003-10-17 2011-05-03 Exterior Portfolio, Llc Grooved foam backed panels
US8225568B1 (en) 2003-10-17 2012-07-24 Exterior Portfolio, Llc Backed building structure panel having grooved and ribbed surface
US8225567B1 (en) 2003-10-17 2012-07-24 Exterior Portfolio, Llc Siding having backer with features for drainage, ventilation, and receiving adhesive
US8336269B1 (en) 2003-10-17 2012-12-25 Exterior Portfolio Llc Siding having facing and backing portion with grooved and ribbed backing portion surface
US20050108965A1 (en) * 2003-11-26 2005-05-26 Morse Rick J. Clapboard siding panel with built in fastener support
FR2864569A1 (en) * 2003-12-24 2005-07-01 Aboville Norbert D Wooden boards assembling device for obtaining e.g. wall covering, has wooden boards including cleat and groove, whose beveled shapes are coupled to each other such that one wooden board slides in other board
US7383669B2 (en) * 2004-03-01 2008-06-10 Certainteed Corporation Siding starter strip
WO2005121476A1 (en) * 2004-06-08 2005-12-22 Cosmic Garden Co., Ltd. Tile and fastener therefor
US7998571B2 (en) 2004-07-09 2011-08-16 James Hardie Technology Limited Composite cement article incorporating a powder coating and methods of making same
US7762040B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2010-07-27 Progressive Foam Technologies, Inc. Insulated fiber cement siding
US8910444B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2014-12-16 Progressive Foam Technologies, Inc. Foam insulation backer board
US8844233B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2014-09-30 Progressive Foam Technologies, Inc. Foam insulation board with edge sealer
US8910443B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2014-12-16 Progressive Foam Technologies, Inc. Foam backer for insulation
US8857123B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2014-10-14 Progressive Foam Technologies, Inc. Foam insulation board
US20060070331A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-06 Yakobics Jeff A Versatile tapeless drywall system
US20060068188A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-03-30 Morse Rick J Foam backed fiber cement
CN100432352C (en) * 2004-10-22 2008-11-12 李明杨 Levelling and hanging thermal-insulating composite decoration panel and construction method thereof
US7748183B2 (en) * 2004-11-09 2010-07-06 Composite Foam Material Technology, Llc System, methods and compositions for attaching paneling to a building surface
US20060103045A1 (en) 2004-11-17 2006-05-18 O'brien-Bernini Frank C Wet use chopped strand glass as reinforcement in extruded products
US8006455B1 (en) 2004-12-29 2011-08-30 Exterior Portfolio, Llc Backed panel and system for connecting backed panels
US20060185299A1 (en) * 2005-02-08 2006-08-24 Alain Poupart Building panel
US20060207201A1 (en) * 2005-03-04 2006-09-21 Klimek David J Panel system and method
US20070193150A1 (en) * 2005-09-09 2007-08-23 Premier Forest Products, Inc. Siding system and method
US7685787B1 (en) 2005-12-28 2010-03-30 Crane Building Products Llc System and method for leveling or alignment of panels
US7908814B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2011-03-22 Progressive Foam Technologies, Inc. Composite siding using a shape molded foam backing member
US20080063218A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2008-03-13 Weber Douglas J Machined window undercut
US8695303B2 (en) * 2007-07-06 2014-04-15 Top Down Siding, Llc Panels including trap lock adaptor strips
NZ552042A (en) * 2006-12-12 2009-05-31 Matthew Bruce Grant Cladding system
EP1935558A1 (en) * 2006-12-19 2008-06-25 Pilkington Italia S.p.A. System and process for manufacturing frameless windows
EP1936088A1 (en) * 2006-12-19 2008-06-25 Pilkington Italia S.p.A. Frameless window and process for its manufacture
WO2008124527A1 (en) * 2007-04-04 2008-10-16 Gary Monteer Lap siding systems
USD742552S1 (en) 2007-07-06 2015-11-03 Top Down Siding, Llc Front face of a building siding panel
EP2237924A1 (en) * 2007-12-18 2010-10-13 Alcoa Inc. Apparatus and method for grinding work rollers
US7735277B1 (en) * 2008-02-06 2010-06-15 Clint Everhart Simulated brick building panel
US20090241458A1 (en) * 2008-03-27 2009-10-01 Ko Das Siding Panel Assembly With Splicing Member and Insulating Panel
US20090293407A1 (en) * 2008-06-02 2009-12-03 Lief Eric Swanson Building exterior panels and method
US20110162295A1 (en) * 2008-06-02 2011-07-07 James Hardie Technology Limited Fibre cement lining board and uses thereof
US20090308010A1 (en) * 2008-06-16 2009-12-17 Thomas Lam Structural element
US20100101169A1 (en) * 2008-09-25 2010-04-29 Tapco International Corporation Siding system or roof shingle system comprising cementitious material, and systems and methods for manufacturing the same
US8111813B2 (en) * 2008-09-30 2012-02-07 Avaya Inc. Unified greeting service for telecommunications events
AU2010232366B2 (en) * 2009-04-03 2015-07-16 James Hardie Technology Limited Cementitious articles, formulations, methods of making and uses
US8660165B2 (en) * 2009-06-11 2014-02-25 Andrew Llc System and method for detecting spread spectrum signals in a wireless environment
US8223821B2 (en) * 2009-06-25 2012-07-17 Andrew Llc Uplink signal detection in RF repeaters
IT1399294B1 (en) * 2009-07-02 2013-04-11 Plotegher MODULAR CLADDING TILE
US8176360B2 (en) 2009-08-11 2012-05-08 Texas Memory Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for addressing actual or predicted failures in a FLASH-based storage system
US20110277409A1 (en) * 2010-05-13 2011-11-17 Atkinson David J Wood planks with brick-like surface features and method of making same
US8381472B1 (en) 2010-06-17 2013-02-26 Exterior Portfolio, Llc System and method for adjoining siding
NO2860132T3 (en) * 2010-11-05 2018-05-19
US8375660B2 (en) 2011-01-07 2013-02-19 Azek Building Products, Inc. Interlocking decorative trim system
US8795813B2 (en) 2011-02-22 2014-08-05 Exterior Portfolio, Llc Ribbed backed panels
US20130180198A1 (en) * 2011-08-04 2013-07-18 E I Du Pont De Nemours And Company Shiplap joint
US20130031864A1 (en) * 2011-08-04 2013-02-07 Schools Zachary S Roofing tile system and method
CN102392521A (en) * 2011-09-30 2012-03-28 倪既民 Heat-bondable easy-to-attach veneer
GB2496855A (en) * 2011-11-22 2013-05-29 Hardie James Technology Ltd Cladding element for use in wall construction
US9109363B2 (en) * 2012-02-02 2015-08-18 William Grau Interlocking panel siding
US8833021B2 (en) * 2013-02-08 2014-09-16 Mospen Products Company Exterior wall decorative foam panel
US9279255B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2016-03-08 Building Materials Investment Corporation Light weight shingle
EP2792461A1 (en) * 2013-04-15 2014-10-22 Redco NV A hatschek process for the production of fiber cement plates
US9051736B2 (en) * 2013-08-05 2015-06-09 Delta Faucet Comopany Wall system
CN105745383B (en) 2013-09-16 2019-02-15 百斯特伍德公司 Surface covering jointing
USD757960S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-31 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD755992S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-10 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD755411S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-03 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD755990S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-10 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD755408S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-03 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD755407S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-03 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD755991S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-10 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD755993S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-10 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD755989S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-05-10 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Building material
USD788949S1 (en) * 2014-08-01 2017-06-06 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Siding
US11091917B2 (en) * 2014-08-27 2021-08-17 James Hardie Technology Limited Cladding element
CN105774366B (en) * 2014-12-24 2019-02-05 嘉华特种水泥股份有限公司 Fibre cement colored carving board production technology
US9951514B2 (en) 2015-09-17 2018-04-24 Todd DeBuff Flashing for concrete board siding
USD783185S1 (en) * 2016-04-28 2017-04-04 Boral Ip Holdings (Australia) Pty Limited Siding
US9663954B1 (en) * 2016-07-14 2017-05-30 Jorge Pablo Fernandez Interlocking roof cement paver and method to manufacture
CN106812280B (en) * 2016-12-29 2022-08-16 佛山市盛画世纪建材有限公司 U-shaped component suitable for splicing and installing between brick boards
US10472820B2 (en) 2017-05-11 2019-11-12 Timothy Dennis Lutz Exterior insulated finish wall assembly
US20200270871A1 (en) * 2019-02-27 2020-08-27 Louisiana-Pacific Corporation Fire-resistant manufactured-wood based siding
US11007697B1 (en) 2017-10-25 2021-05-18 Green Bay Decking, LLC Composite extruded products and systems for manufacturing the same
US11254817B2 (en) 2018-03-31 2022-02-22 Certainteed Llc Polyurethane composite material, article comprising the material and method of manufacture
US11485094B2 (en) * 2018-05-18 2022-11-01 Polysto Process for the production of an article for the cladding of floors or walls
WO2019231994A1 (en) 2018-05-29 2019-12-05 Ocv Intellectual Capital, Llc Glass fiber mat with low-density fibers
CA3138206A1 (en) 2019-06-28 2020-12-30 James Hardie Technology Limited Cladding element
CN111287400A (en) * 2019-07-15 2020-06-16 张经仑 Foamed cement or ceramic decorative component and preparation method and application thereof
US11840845B2 (en) * 2020-05-08 2023-12-12 Tundra Composites, LLC Sliding joinery
WO2024044397A1 (en) * 2022-08-26 2024-02-29 Louisiana-Pacific Corporation Self-sealing insulated panel

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2413794A (en) * 1944-10-26 1947-01-07 Elden P Reising Securement means for shingle and siding units
US6122876A (en) * 1994-03-29 2000-09-26 James Hardie Research Pty. Limited Cladding board

Family Cites Families (602)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US575074A (en) * 1897-01-12 Molder s core
US369216A (en) 1887-08-30 Compound board
CA730345A (en) 1966-03-22 B. Mccready William Metal soffit
US2253753A (en) 1941-08-26 Building covering
US517122A (en) * 1894-03-27 Office furniture
US525442A (en) 1894-09-04 Weather-boarding
US494763A (en) * 1893-04-04 Cement
US774114A (en) 1903-12-11 1904-11-01 William Spear Weather-boarding apparatus.
US815801A (en) * 1905-02-10 1906-03-20 Pumice Stone Construction Company Building material.
GB119182A (en) 1918-02-11 1918-09-26 Richard Fairfax Stone A Means to Prevent the Warping of Filing Cabinet and other Drawer Fronts, or other Articles of Furniture or Joinery.
US1512084A (en) 1919-03-20 1924-10-21 Packard Motor Car Co Motor vehicle
US1399023A (en) 1920-03-10 1921-12-06 Murray Richard Building block or slab
US1510497A (en) 1923-06-25 1924-10-07 Richardson Co Roofing device
US1634809A (en) 1926-04-28 1927-07-05 Burgess Lab Inc C F Wall board
US1630801A (en) 1926-07-31 1927-05-31 Floyd Y Parsons Wall construction
US1698557A (en) * 1927-04-28 1929-01-08 Denis J O'brien Concrete structure
US1856936A (en) 1928-08-11 1932-05-03 Nat Gypsum Co Plaster board apparatus
US1871843A (en) 1928-10-17 1932-08-16 United States Gypsum Co Method of manufacturing tile board
US1856932A (en) * 1929-10-01 1932-05-03 Nat Gypsum Co Method and apparatus for making plaster board
US1943663A (en) * 1929-10-30 1934-01-16 United States Gypsum Co Tile board and method of manufacturing same
US1997939A (en) * 1930-10-28 1935-04-16 James F Loucks Sheet metal building construction
US1959519A (en) 1930-11-21 1934-05-22 Black Systems Inc Building covering
US1930024A (en) 1931-01-07 1933-10-10 Anthony J Varden Cement lath
US1976984A (en) 1931-03-02 1934-10-16 Gleason Works Gear cutting machine
US2009619A (en) 1932-04-07 1935-07-30 Johns Manville Thermal insulating material and method of making the same
US1978519A (en) 1932-11-15 1934-10-30 John P Willock Roofing construction
US1995393A (en) * 1933-03-15 1935-03-26 United States Gypsum Co Self-furring plaster board
US2062149A (en) 1934-12-05 1936-11-24 Patent & Licensing Corp Composition roofing
US2182372A (en) 1938-06-17 1939-12-05 Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co Building covering
US2224351A (en) 1939-03-31 1940-12-10 Briktex Inc Building unit
US2324325A (en) 1939-04-29 1943-07-13 Carbide & Carbon Chem Corp Surfaced cement fiber product
US2317634A (en) * 1940-01-13 1943-04-27 Anders C Olsen Building construction
US2276170A (en) * 1940-10-26 1942-03-10 Elmendorf Armin Siding for buildings
US2323230A (en) 1941-02-28 1943-06-29 Mcavoy Trush Composition shingle
GB558584A (en) 1942-07-02 1944-01-12 Edwin Airey Improvements in or relating to walls or like structures
GB558239A (en) 1942-08-07 1943-12-28 Leslie Shingleton Improvements relating to concrete structures
US2354639A (en) 1942-11-28 1944-07-25 A R Exiner Double seal siding
GB564447A (en) 1943-03-26 1944-09-28 Leslie Shingleton Improvements in and relating to the moulding of concrete structures
US2400357A (en) 1943-10-08 1946-05-14 Celotex Corp Unit for roofs and walls
US2517122A (en) 1945-04-23 1950-08-01 Lloyd K Lockwood Fastener for roofing and the like
US2447275A (en) 1946-08-13 1948-08-17 James G Price Shingles and clips therefor
US2511083A (en) 1946-08-30 1950-06-13 Byron Nugent Assembly of roofing and siding units
FR990242A (en) 1949-05-02 1951-09-19 Improvements to wooden slabs and similar materials
US2782463A (en) 1951-05-01 1957-02-26 Bergvall Knut Lennart Prefabricated wooden building
US2694025A (en) 1951-06-27 1954-11-09 Owens Corning Fiberglass Corp Structural panel
US2624298A (en) * 1951-09-04 1953-01-06 Farren Roy Tile roof structure
US2724872A (en) 1951-12-08 1955-11-29 Ruberoid Co Siding underlay strip
US3046700A (en) 1955-09-21 1962-07-31 Aaron W L Davenport Weatherboarding construction and method for exterior walls
US2928143A (en) * 1956-09-26 1960-03-15 Building Products Ltd Ventilated siding and panel clip
US3047985A (en) 1957-05-06 1962-08-07 Jean C Chognard Panel tie
US3181662A (en) 1960-12-23 1965-05-04 Jr Joseph N Maertzig Mounting construction for chalk boards, corkboards and like panels
US3173229A (en) * 1961-02-16 1965-03-16 Weber Elmer Siding structure
CH368918A (en) 1962-01-30 1963-04-30 H Ickler Oskar Panel, in particular cement asbestos panel façades and processes for producing the same
US3235039A (en) * 1962-07-30 1966-02-15 Johns Manville Curtain wall support system
US3214876A (en) 1962-12-10 1965-11-02 Mastic Corp Nail anchored building siding
US3236932A (en) 1963-02-19 1966-02-22 Daniel P Grigas Apparatus for applying metallic siding
US3274743A (en) 1963-07-10 1966-09-27 Jr Joseph Louis Blum Interlocking wallboard
BE657693A (en) 1964-01-04
US3333379A (en) 1964-02-21 1967-08-01 Nat Gypsum Co Resilient furring channel
US3284980A (en) 1964-07-15 1966-11-15 Paul E Dinkel Hydraulic cement panel with low density core and fiber reinforced high density surface layers
GB1113645A (en) 1965-06-23 1968-05-15 Loghem Johannes J Van Improvements in or relating to a wall construction and/or methods of erecting said wall construction
US3421281A (en) 1965-10-04 1969-01-14 Fibreboard Corp Resilient channel member
US3527004A (en) 1965-11-19 1970-09-08 Jens Ole Sorensen Building board for building house models on a module system
GB1174902A (en) 1966-05-03 1969-12-17 Alan William David Marshall Improvements in and relating to Building Structures
GB1125825A (en) 1966-08-03 1968-09-05 Malcolm Neville Shute Improvements in or relating to guttering
DE1952082U (en) 1966-10-07 1966-12-22 Geyer Fa Christian LINE INPUT PREFERABLY FOR ENCLOSED HOUSE CONNECTION BOXES.
GB1206395A (en) 1966-10-25 1970-09-23 Colin Henry Davidson Improvements relating to cast or moulded building units
US3408786A (en) 1967-01-11 1968-11-05 Boise Cascade Corp Siding clip fastener means
US3415019A (en) 1967-03-10 1968-12-10 Melvin A. Andersen Integral soffit and fascia unit of synthetic plastic
US3606720A (en) 1968-05-20 1971-09-21 Cookson Sheet Metal Dev Ltd Roofing and siding sheets and the like and fastening means therefor
GB1269357A (en) 1968-08-12 1972-04-06 Marley Tile Co Ltd Improvements in roof soffit fittings
US3635742A (en) * 1969-08-14 1972-01-18 Fujimasu Ind International Calcining alkaline earth metal chlorides with cellulose and admixing with portland cement
US3625808A (en) * 1969-09-29 1971-12-07 Martin Fireproofing Corp Composite concrete and cement-wood fiber plank
DE1949217C3 (en) 1969-09-30 1979-03-29 Hans 5463 Unkel Simon Ventilation for a cold roof
US3869295A (en) * 1970-03-30 1975-03-04 Andrew D Bowles Uniform lightweight concrete and plaster
US3708943A (en) * 1970-04-22 1973-01-09 Olin Corp Aluminum facing and roofing sheet system
US3663353A (en) 1970-06-01 1972-05-16 Fitchburg Paper Co Plastic laminate structure consisting of a plastic film laminated to a substrate with a resin impregnated paper intermediate layer
AT320238B (en) 1971-01-13 1975-01-27 Certain Teed St Gobain Insulating element for building purposes
US3663341A (en) 1971-01-25 1972-05-16 Westvaco Corp Three sheet overlay and laminates comprising the same
US3729368A (en) * 1971-04-21 1973-04-24 Ingham & Co Ltd R E Wood-plastic sheet laminate and method of making same
US3703795A (en) 1971-05-28 1972-11-28 Mastic Corp Building siding units
US3888617A (en) 1971-06-04 1975-06-10 Louis H Barnett Apparatus for forming multiple passageway conduit
US3797179A (en) * 1971-06-25 1974-03-19 N Jackson Mansard roof structure
US3866378A (en) * 1971-10-12 1975-02-18 Gerald Kessler Siding with loose plastic film facing
CA971726A (en) 1971-10-26 1975-07-29 Bruce M. Hudd Wall siding fasteners
US3780483A (en) 1971-11-09 1973-12-25 Mastic Corp Building siding unit with interlocking backing board and outer panel
US3921346A (en) 1971-11-12 1975-11-25 Nat Gypsum Co Fire retardant shaft wall
US3782985A (en) * 1971-11-26 1974-01-01 Cadcom Inc Lightweight,high strength concrete and method for manufacturing the same
US4110507A (en) 1972-01-07 1978-08-29 Colledge Gary C Branded plasterboard product
US4076884A (en) * 1972-03-22 1978-02-28 The Governing Council Of The University Of Toronto Fibre reinforcing composites
US3847633A (en) 1972-04-10 1974-11-12 Litvin R Building material for modular construction
US3804058A (en) * 1972-05-01 1974-04-16 Mobil Oil Corp Process of treating a well using a lightweight cement
US3902911A (en) 1972-05-01 1975-09-02 Mobil Oil Corp Lightweight cement
US3797190A (en) * 1972-08-10 1974-03-19 Smith E Division Cyclops Corp Prefabricated, insulated, metal wall panel
US3818668A (en) 1972-08-24 1974-06-25 J Charniga Siding mounting strip
US3852934A (en) * 1973-01-10 1974-12-10 W Kirkhuff Interlocking shingle arrangement
US3974024A (en) 1973-03-23 1976-08-10 Onoda Cement Company, Ltd. Process for producing board of cement-like material reinforced by glass fiber
US4063393A (en) 1973-05-10 1977-12-20 Toti Andrew J Panel assembly structure and procedure for assembling same
US3986312A (en) 1973-10-05 1976-10-19 Ralph Calhoun Demountable wall assembly and components therefor
FR2248246A1 (en) 1973-10-19 1975-05-16 Commissariat Energie Atomique Concrete with very high compression strength - made using sand consisting of porous roasted clay
US3928701A (en) 1974-07-16 1975-12-23 Soll Roehner Helix of a series of discarded vehicle tires
US4377977A (en) * 1974-08-26 1983-03-29 The Mosler Safe Company Concrete security structures and method for making same
US4130685A (en) 1974-09-20 1978-12-19 Tarullo John A Cork wall covering
CA981124A (en) 1974-11-15 1976-01-06 John C. Barker Simulated ceramic tile
DE2460879A1 (en) 1974-12-21 1976-06-24 Horst Hahn Curtain walling cladding panels fixture - with base anchored vertical rails with horizontal bolts and two panel rear anchors
DE2460880A1 (en) 1974-12-21 1976-06-24 Horst Hahn Curtain-wall panel or other building element anchorage - involving panel recess, and screw or similar base attachment
US4132555A (en) * 1975-01-02 1979-01-02 Cape Boards & Panels Ltd. Building board
US3992845A (en) 1975-04-02 1976-11-23 Abitibi Corporation Wall siding fasteners and assemblies
US4079562A (en) * 1975-04-30 1978-03-21 Englert Metals Corporation Siding starter clip for securing to the side of a structure and engaging a siding starter panel
IT1038127B (en) 1975-05-14 1979-11-20 Sips THERMAL INSULATION PANEL PROVIDED WITH SHAPED COVERINGS CONNECTED BY APPROPRIATE INTERLOCKING ELEMENTS AND PRESENTING THE INGLOBATING EDGES OF THE SEALING GASKETS
GB1512084A (en) 1975-06-19 1978-05-24 Formica Int Structural materials
AT339011B (en) 1975-07-07 1977-09-26 Leitl Werke Bauhuette BUILDING WALL, IN PARTICULAR FACADE CONSTRUCTION MADE OF PLATE SHAPED, E.G. CERAMIC COMPONENTS
CA1024716A (en) * 1975-07-18 1978-01-24 Charles F. Gross Panel mounting
US4014103A (en) * 1975-09-17 1977-03-29 Leo Roth Measuring device
US4015392A (en) * 1976-01-26 1977-04-05 Masonite Corporation Building wall panel system
ZA771177B (en) 1976-03-15 1978-01-25 A C I Tech Centre Improvements relating to clay compositions
DE2610998C3 (en) 1976-03-16 1978-11-23 Fulguritwerke Seelze Und Eichriede In Luthe Bei Hannover Adolf Oesterheld, 3050 Wunstorf Bracket for fastening cladding panels in front of a building wall
US4052829A (en) 1976-03-17 1977-10-11 Chapman Ward W Semi-prefabricated monolithic steel-reinforced cement building construction
US4047355A (en) 1976-05-03 1977-09-13 Studco, Inc. Shaftwall
US4187658A (en) * 1976-05-20 1980-02-12 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Panel clamp
PL106840B1 (en) 1976-06-03 1980-01-31 HOW TO DETERMINE THE STATE OF REINFORCEMENT
US4034528A (en) 1976-06-18 1977-07-12 Aegean Industries, Inc. Insulating vinyl siding
CA1084230A (en) 1976-06-25 1980-08-26 Joseph A. Hafner Construction panel
SU587123A1 (en) 1976-07-22 1978-01-05 Киевский Ордена Трудового Красного Знамени Инженерно-Строительный Институт Raw mixture for manufacturing construction brick
US4274239A (en) 1976-09-03 1981-06-23 Carroll Research, Inc. Building structure
US4010587A (en) * 1976-09-07 1977-03-08 Larsen Glen D Nailable flooring construction
US4101335A (en) 1976-11-04 1978-07-18 Cape Boards & Panels Ltd. Building board
US4070843A (en) * 1976-12-16 1978-01-31 Robert Leggiere Simulated shingle arrangement
US4102106A (en) 1976-12-28 1978-07-25 Gaf Corporation Siding panel
SU607813A1 (en) 1977-01-03 1978-05-25 Государственный Всесоюзный Научно-Исследовательский Институт Строительных Материалов И Конструкций Имени П.П.Будникова Raw mixture for making hydrothermally hardened construction articles
US4104840A (en) 1977-01-10 1978-08-08 Inryco, Inc. Metal building panel
US4128696A (en) 1977-02-11 1978-12-05 Formica Corporation Low pressure melamine resin laminates
GB1577648A (en) 1977-03-04 1980-10-29 Sadacem Curtain wall structure
DE2710548C2 (en) 1977-03-10 1982-02-11 Rudolf 8019 Moosach Hinterwaldner Storage-stable hardenable composition and method for hardening it
US4292364A (en) * 1977-04-27 1981-09-29 Heidelberger Zement Aktiengesellschaft Multi-layer board
US4112647A (en) 1977-05-02 1978-09-12 Scheid Lloyd J Movable partition wall system
US4152878A (en) 1977-06-03 1979-05-08 United States Gypsum Company Stud for forming fire-rated wall and structure formed therewith
US4183188A (en) * 1977-07-12 1980-01-15 Goldsby Claude W Simulated brick panel, composition and method
FR2405908A1 (en) 1977-10-14 1979-05-11 Tech Tuiles Briques Centre Clay building prods. made without baking - where hardened prods. are soaked in water to provide high dimensional stability
SU655678A1 (en) 1977-11-10 1979-04-05 Белгородский технологический институт строительных материалов Mix for filling up worked-out space
US4150517A (en) 1977-12-27 1979-04-24 Warner Robert L Replaceable corner molding
US4166749A (en) 1978-01-05 1979-09-04 W. R. Grace & Co. Low density insulating compositions containing combusted bark particles
US4203788A (en) 1978-03-16 1980-05-20 Clear Theodore E Methods for manufacturing cementitious reinforced panels
US4195455A (en) 1978-05-17 1980-04-01 Alcan Aluminum Corporation Adjustable soffit system
US4231573A (en) 1978-07-21 1980-11-04 General Electric Company Bowling lane and surface
US5234754A (en) 1978-11-03 1993-08-10 Bache Hans H Shaped article and composite material and method for producing same
US4211525A (en) 1978-12-05 1980-07-08 Rohm Gmbh Apparatus for making stretched, hollow shaped strands having corrugated intermediate supports
US4222785A (en) 1978-12-11 1980-09-16 Henderson Eugene R Building material
US4268317A (en) 1978-12-22 1981-05-19 Rayl Layton L Lightweight insulating structural concrete
US4343127A (en) 1979-02-07 1982-08-10 Georgia-Pacific Corporation Fire door
GB2041384A (en) 1979-02-10 1980-09-10 Pennington J Improvements in and Relating to Board Products and Mouldings
DK63179A (en) 1979-02-14 1980-08-15 Rockwool Int FIBER ARMED CEMENT PRODUCT AND PROCEDURES FOR PRODUCING THE SAME
NL8000196A (en) 1979-03-01 1980-09-03 Stamicarbon LAYER-COMPOSITE PLATE.
US4321780A (en) 1979-07-12 1982-03-30 Atlantic Building Systems, Inc. Snap cap for architectural wall panel
US4298647A (en) 1979-07-16 1981-11-03 Clopay Corporation Cross-tearable decorative sheet material
US4380564A (en) * 1979-07-16 1983-04-19 Clopay Corporation Cross-tearable decorative sheet material
US4379553A (en) * 1979-07-20 1983-04-12 General Electric Company Bowling lane with fire retardant decorative surface
US4307551A (en) 1979-08-09 1981-12-29 Ppg Industries, Inc. System for cladding building exteriors
US4399643A (en) 1979-10-16 1983-08-23 Hafner Joseph A Panel lock structure
US4337290A (en) 1979-11-16 1982-06-29 General Electric Company High impact resistant laminate surface for a bowling lane
SE7910156L (en) 1979-12-10 1981-06-11 Statens Skogsind Ab ROOF OR FLOOR PANEL SUPPLIED WITH NOTES AND CUTS AND SEED AS MANUFACTURING A SUCH DISC
DE3001278A1 (en) 1980-01-15 1981-07-30 Annawerk Gmbh CERAMIC PANEL FACADE
US4406703A (en) 1980-02-04 1983-09-27 Permawood International Corporation Composite materials made from plant fibers bonded with portland cement and method of producing same
US4327528A (en) 1980-02-29 1982-05-04 Wolverine Aluminum Corporation Insulated siding system
US4366657A (en) 1980-03-05 1983-01-04 Fred Hopman Method and form for mechanically pouring adobe structures
GB2075079B (en) 1980-04-26 1984-05-23 Coba Plastics Ltd Capping strip
WO1981003170A1 (en) 1980-05-01 1981-11-12 Aalborg Portland Cement Shaped article and composite material and method for producing same
GR65512B7 (en) 1980-06-25 1980-09-12 Greek Ind Tech Comm & Mining C Covering with melamine sheet of plane plaques from immaculate cement
AU515151B1 (en) 1980-07-21 1981-03-19 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Fibre-reinforced cementitious articles
US4338759A (en) 1980-07-28 1982-07-13 Universal Component Systems, Inc. Method of building construction using concrete reinforced wall modules
GB2083512B (en) 1980-08-19 1985-05-09 Amfu Ltd Gasket material
US4370166A (en) * 1980-09-04 1983-01-25 Standard Oil Company (Indiana) Low density cement slurry and its use
NL8007129A (en) 1980-12-31 1982-07-16 Nagron Steel & Aluminium METHOD AND CONSTRUCTION ELEMENT FOR BUILDING A BUILDING AND A BUILDING SO.
DE3134973C2 (en) * 1981-01-23 1983-12-29 Veith Pirelli AG, 6128 Höchst Device for attaching a flexible sheet to a wall
US4462730A (en) 1981-02-02 1984-07-31 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Painted screw and washer assemblies
US4730398A (en) * 1981-02-17 1988-03-15 Stanton Carl A Preliminary recording activity by guide and point
US4392336A (en) 1981-03-13 1983-07-12 Ganssle Jack L Drywall construction and article of manufacture therefor
US4930287A (en) 1981-05-14 1990-06-05 National Gypsum Company Distortion-free vinyl siding
AU559883B2 (en) 1981-06-03 1987-03-26 Ever-On Chemicals Pty. Ltd. Attaching overlapping planks etc.
FI822075L (en) * 1981-06-19 1982-12-20 Cape Universal Claddings BYGGNADSSKIVOR
US4463532A (en) 1981-06-29 1984-08-07 Precision Interlock Log Homes, Inc. Prefabricated wall unit for log building construction, method of producing same and method of constructing log building therewith
US4465729A (en) 1981-08-05 1984-08-14 Clopay Corporation Cross-tearable plastic films
DE3131548A1 (en) 1981-08-08 1983-02-24 Otavi Minen Ag, 6000 Frankfurt "LIGHTWEIGHT MATERIAL AND METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF"
AU8858982A (en) 1981-09-21 1983-03-31 Hediger, A. Lining soffits and eaves
US4442219A (en) * 1981-10-19 1984-04-10 Kennecott Corporation Two part castable ceramic cement
US4373955A (en) * 1981-11-04 1983-02-15 Chicago Bridge & Iron Company Lightweight insulating concrete
US4506486A (en) * 1981-12-08 1985-03-26 Culpepper & Wilson, Inc. Composite siding panel
US4441944A (en) * 1981-12-31 1984-04-10 Pmp Corporation Building board composition and method of making same
FR2522049A1 (en) 1982-02-25 1983-08-26 Guerin Gabriel DEVICE FOR FASTENING A STONE PLATE COATING RECONSTITUTED ON A WALL STRUCTURE
DE3210326A1 (en) 1982-03-20 1983-09-22 M.A.N. Maschinenfabrik Augsburg-Nürnberg AG, 8000 München Device for holding covering panels
US4420351A (en) 1982-04-29 1983-12-13 Tarkett Ab Method of making decorative laminated products such as tiles, panels or webs from cellulosic materials
DE3230311A1 (en) 1982-08-14 1984-02-16 Ytong AG, 8000 München DOUBLE-WALLED MASONRY
DE3232106C2 (en) 1982-08-28 1995-11-09 Bwm Duebel & Montagetech Fastening system for a curtain wall or ceiling cladding with a mounting rail or plate
US4424261A (en) * 1982-09-23 1984-01-03 American Cyanamid Company Hydroxyisopropylmelamine modified melamine-formaldehyde resin
US4429214A (en) * 1982-09-27 1984-01-31 National Gypsum Company Electrical heating panel
US4559894A (en) 1982-11-26 1985-12-24 Thom Mci, Inc. Fiber-cement deck structure
US4670079A (en) 1982-11-26 1987-06-02 Thompson Thomas L Method of forming a walking-surface panel
SU1114646A1 (en) 1982-12-13 1984-09-23 Марийский Политехнический Институт Им.М.Горького Raw mix for making light-weight silica brick
FR2540160A1 (en) 1983-02-01 1984-08-03 Prefabrication Indle Et Device for fastening prefabricated facade panels onto the structure of a building
US4514947A (en) 1983-05-18 1985-05-07 Embelton-Grail, Inc. Roof tile and tile composition of matter
US4504320A (en) * 1983-09-26 1985-03-12 Research One Limited Partnership Light-weight cementitious product
GB2147286B (en) 1983-09-30 1986-11-05 Unisearch Ltd Building material
SE453181B (en) 1983-10-05 1988-01-18 Bengt Hedberg SET TO MAKE LIGHT BALL CONCRETE
GB2148871B (en) 1983-10-31 1987-01-07 Pilkington Brothers Plc Sheet material of fibre-reinforced cement
NZ210395A (en) 1983-12-05 1987-08-31 Allied Resource Management Cladding tile with groove for fixing
US4501830A (en) * 1984-01-05 1985-02-26 Research One Limited Partnership Rapid set lightweight cement product
US5644880A (en) 1984-02-27 1997-07-08 Georgia-Pacific Corporation Gypsum board and systems containing same
WO1985003965A1 (en) 1984-02-28 1985-09-12 Bruce Capper Supporting assemblies
DE3409597A1 (en) * 1984-03-15 1985-09-26 Baierl & Demmelhuber GmbH & Co Akustik & Trockenbau KG, 8121 Pähl ASBEST-FREE BUILDING MATERIAL PARTS AND METHOD FOR THEIR PRODUCTION
FR2562591A1 (en) * 1984-04-06 1985-10-11 Gen Batiment Cladding system for buildings
DE3426060A1 (en) 1984-04-19 1986-01-16 Röhm GmbH, 6100 Darmstadt EXTRUDED MULTIPLE PLATE WITH CORRUGATED BRIDGES AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THEIR PRODUCTION
US4661398A (en) * 1984-04-25 1987-04-28 Delphic Research Laboratories, Inc. Fire-barrier plywood
FR2566388B1 (en) * 1984-06-25 1986-11-14 Champagnole Ciments IMPROVEMENTS IN THE MANUFACTURE OF HYDRAULIC BINDERS AND PRODUCTS THUS OBTAINED
US4592185A (en) 1984-07-02 1986-06-03 Masonite Corporation Building panel
US4594291A (en) * 1984-07-17 1986-06-10 The Dow Chemical Company Curable, partially advanced epoxy resins
NZ212802A (en) 1984-07-19 1989-03-29 William Graham Hitchins Framed and braced foam filled clad panel: side and transverse frame members merely butted together
US4586304A (en) 1984-07-24 1986-05-06 Robert Flamand Insulated siding and method for its application
US4779313A (en) 1984-07-30 1988-10-25 Voplex Corporation Retainer for molded panel
DE3577290D1 (en) 1984-08-24 1990-05-31 Marley Tile Ag LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE TILE.
GB8421605D0 (en) 1984-08-24 1984-09-26 Marley Roof Tile Lightweight concrete roof tiles
FR2572723A1 (en) 1984-11-05 1986-05-09 Lavau Jacques PROCESS FOR PRODUCING CLAY-BASED MINERAL PRODUCTS WITH HIGH DIMENSIONAL STABILITY, AND PRODUCTS THEREOF
US4969302A (en) 1985-01-15 1990-11-13 Abitibi-Price Corporation Siding panels
ATA17585A (en) 1985-01-24 1986-01-15 Putz Helmar BUILDING BOARD, PARTICULARLY PLASTERBOARD
DE3505335C2 (en) 1985-02-15 1996-01-18 Gruenzweig & Hartmann Montage Wall cladding
US4640715A (en) * 1985-03-06 1987-02-03 Lone Star Industries, Inc. Mineral binder and compositions employing the same
US4642137A (en) * 1985-03-06 1987-02-10 Lone Star Industries, Inc. Mineral binder and compositions employing the same
US4698942A (en) 1985-05-09 1987-10-13 Swartz Gary D Clip for holding and spacing siding panels
US5143780A (en) 1985-06-12 1992-09-01 Balassa Leslie L Hydrated fibrous mats for use in curing cement and concrete
US4641469A (en) * 1985-07-18 1987-02-10 Wood Edward F Prefabricated insulating panels
US4748771A (en) 1985-07-30 1988-06-07 Georgia-Pacific Corporation Fire door
AU94035S (en) 1985-08-15 1986-11-06 Hills Industries Ltd Antenna boom bracket
DE3533737A1 (en) 1985-09-21 1987-03-26 Hoechst Ag DECORATIVE PLATE WITH IMPROVED SURFACE PROPERTIES
GB8525723D0 (en) 1985-10-18 1985-11-20 Redland Technology Ltd Cementitious compositions
JPH0615431B2 (en) 1985-11-08 1994-03-02 日東紡績株式会社 Glass fiber reinforced cement press molding
US4952631A (en) 1986-01-03 1990-08-28 Exxon Chemical Patents Inc. Compositions for preparing cement-adhesive reinforcing fibers
DE3608544C1 (en) 1986-03-14 1987-04-09 Redco Nv Lightweight insulation panels and methods of making the same
AU95878S (en) 1986-05-14 1987-03-26 The Roofing Centre Pty Ltd A closure strip for channel sections
US4685263A (en) 1986-05-23 1987-08-11 Ting Raymond M L Aluminum plate curtain wall structure
DE3621010A1 (en) 1986-06-23 1988-01-07 Villeroy & Boch Facade cladding comprising ceramic panels, and process for the production thereof
FR2601356B1 (en) 1986-07-10 1992-06-05 Saint Gobain Vetrotex CEMENT BASED PRODUCT FIBERGLASS WEAPON.
DK337186D0 (en) * 1986-07-15 1986-07-15 Densit As PROCEDURE AND MATERIALS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF A FORMATED ITEM
US4780141A (en) 1986-08-08 1988-10-25 Cemcom Corporation Cementitious composite material containing metal fiber
CH670671A5 (en) 1986-08-15 1989-06-30 Dow Chemical Europ
AU98800S (en) 1986-10-22 1987-12-03 Locking element
GB2199857B (en) 1987-01-08 1991-05-08 Francis Donald Dales Building panels.
FR2624870B1 (en) * 1987-12-22 1992-01-03 Elf Aquitaine ACRYLIC ADHESIVE COMPOSITION HAVING IMPROVED SHEAR RESISTANCE AFTER HARDENING AND ITS APPLICATION TO THE BINDING OF ELEMENTS AND PARTICULARLY STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
US4803105A (en) * 1987-02-13 1989-02-07 Essex Specialty Products, Inc. Reinforcing sheet for the reinforcement of panel and method of reinforcing panel
AU99683S (en) 1987-02-25 1988-02-25 B R Products Pty Ltd Bracket extrusion
NZ218315A (en) 1987-02-28 1990-05-28 Specialized Washers & Gaskets Plastics headed nail
US4854101A (en) 1987-05-27 1989-08-08 Champagne Wendel J Mounting clip for installing siding
US4995605A (en) * 1987-06-29 1991-02-26 Conlab Inc. Panel fastener clip and method of panel assembly
US4985119A (en) * 1987-07-01 1991-01-15 The Procter & Gamble Cellulose Company Cellulose fiber-reinforced structure
IL83208A (en) 1987-07-16 1993-01-14 Tafi Trade & Finance Building structure having high blast and penetration resistance
US4827621A (en) 1987-07-16 1989-05-09 Philip Borsuk Measurement tape for sizing carpet
USD322678S (en) 1987-08-05 1991-12-24 Brathwaite John F C Edge moulding
NZ221573A (en) 1987-08-26 1991-02-26 New Zealand Forest Prod Fibre reinforced cement composites and their preparation
US5115621A (en) 1987-09-10 1992-05-26 O M Kiki Co., Ltd. Free access floor panel
US4842649A (en) 1987-10-02 1989-06-27 Pyrament, Inc. Cement composition curable at low temperatures
US4870788A (en) 1987-10-20 1989-10-03 Melvin Hassan Building panels
US4811538A (en) * 1987-10-20 1989-03-14 Georgia-Pacific Corporation Fire-resistant door
US5080022A (en) * 1987-10-23 1992-01-14 Aerex International Corporation Composite material and method
CA1341084C (en) 1987-11-16 2000-08-15 George W. Green Coated fibrous mat-faced gypsum board resistant to water and humidity
FR2624301B1 (en) * 1987-12-02 1990-03-30 Commissariat Energie Atomique DEVICE FOR CONDITIONING RADIOACTIVE OR TOXIC WASTE CONTAINING BORATE IONS, AND MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREOF
US4955169A (en) 1988-01-25 1990-09-11 Macmillan Bloedel Building Materials Limited Hardboard siding
AU103840S (en) 1988-02-17 1989-05-18 Crane Enfield Metals Pty An extrusion
US4841702A (en) 1988-02-22 1989-06-27 Huettemann Erik W Insulated concrete building panels and method of making the same
JPH01128748U (en) * 1988-02-25 1989-09-01
DE3808401A1 (en) * 1988-03-12 1989-09-21 Blaupunkt Werke Gmbh VEHICLE WINDOW WASHER
FR2628732A1 (en) 1988-03-18 1989-09-22 Saint Gobain Vetrotex PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING A MIXTURE AND MIXTURE BASED ON CEMENT, METAKAOLIN, GLASS FIBERS AND POLYMER
FR2628775B1 (en) 1988-03-21 1991-05-03 Gtm Batimen Travaux Publ INTERMEDIATE VACUUM BUILDING FACADE WALL UNINTERRUPTED BETWEEN FLOORS AND ECONOMIC CONSTRUCTION METHOD
AU102662S (en) 1988-03-28 1989-01-27 Readymix Holdings Pty Ltd A drain lintel
US5252526A (en) 1988-03-30 1993-10-12 Indresco Inc. Insulating refractory
SU1606633A1 (en) 1988-04-04 1990-11-15 Норильский Вечерний Индустриальный Институт Roof tile and method of placing same
US4866896A (en) 1988-04-26 1989-09-19 Construction Specialties, Inc. Panel wall system
US4924644A (en) 1988-05-03 1990-05-15 Lewis David L Construction board grid system with imprint and method of using same
JPH07115902B2 (en) 1988-05-06 1995-12-13 信越化学工業株式会社 Cement composition for extrusion molding
US5045378A (en) 1988-05-19 1991-09-03 Specialty Paperboard Inc. Paperboard sheets with a scribed grid and a method for making the same
GB8813894D0 (en) 1988-06-11 1988-07-13 Redland Roof Tiles Ltd Process for production of concrete building products
US4927696A (en) 1988-07-28 1990-05-22 Berg Louis K Material for use in fabrication
ZA895192B (en) 1988-08-05 1990-04-25 Masonite Corp Scored fiberboard having improved moldability
US4914885A (en) 1988-08-29 1990-04-10 Gory Associated Industries, Inc. Roofing tile
US4969250A (en) 1988-09-19 1990-11-13 W. P. Hickman Company Fascia assembly and method of making same
FR2638000B1 (en) * 1988-10-18 1990-12-14 Kodak Pathe LARGE CAPACITY MAGNETIC MEMORY CARD AND MANUFACTURING METHOD
AU104552S (en) 1988-11-07 1989-08-14 C J S Dev Pty Ltd A joining bracket
US5247773A (en) 1988-11-23 1993-09-28 Weir Richard L Building structures
DE8815364U1 (en) 1988-12-10 1989-03-09 Resopal Gmbh, 6114 Gross-Umstadt, De
US4876827A (en) 1989-01-03 1989-10-31 Williams Robert D Gutter assembly
US4963430A (en) 1989-01-06 1990-10-16 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Corrosion and split resistant plastic materials
US5242736A (en) 1989-01-06 1993-09-07 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Seamless tube useful to make roofing battens and related method
US4995215A (en) 1989-01-23 1991-02-26 National Gypsum Company Panels with laminated strips for clips
US5112405A (en) 1989-01-24 1992-05-12 Sanchez Michael A Lightweight concrete building product
CA1329690C (en) 1989-02-22 1994-05-24 Michael Sommerstein Panel mounting clip
AU110320S (en) 1989-03-22 1991-02-13 Stramit Corp Pty Ltd Purlin
CH678882A5 (en) 1989-04-03 1991-11-15 Eternit Ag Facade-tile invisible mounting - comprises hat-section rails with holes engaged by holding clamps
US5114617A (en) 1989-05-22 1992-05-19 Advanced Concrete Technology, Inc. High strength structural perlite concrete
FR2651492B1 (en) 1989-09-06 1993-06-18 Saint Gobain Rech PROCESS AND PRODUCTS OBTAINED BY MIXING CEMENT AND REINFORCING FIBERS.
DE3923800A1 (en) 1989-07-15 1991-01-24 Montaflex Aluminiumprofile & B Attachment of facade of ceramic tiles - using specially shaped brackets which fit over support rail
US5305577A (en) * 1989-10-12 1994-04-26 Georgia-Pacific Corporation Fire-resistant structure containing gypsum fiberboard
US5077952A (en) * 1989-10-12 1992-01-07 Monier Roof Tile Inc. Roof tile clip
US5155959A (en) 1989-10-12 1992-10-20 Georgia-Pacific Corporation Firedoor constructions including gypsum building product
DE3937433A1 (en) * 1989-11-10 1991-05-16 Knauf Westdeutsche Gips PLASTERBOARD PANEL WITH COATING FROM COATED FIBERGLASS Mats and METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF
FR2654425B1 (en) 1989-11-13 1993-08-27 Prolifix MORTAR FOR PROJECTION.
GB8926808D0 (en) 1989-11-28 1990-01-17 Coseley Building Systems Ltd A cladding panel and system
AU108078S (en) 1989-12-11 1990-07-02 Petrol tank cap holder
US5022207A (en) 1990-01-02 1991-06-11 Aluminum Company Of America Building panel having locking flange and locking receptacle
JP2514734B2 (en) 1990-02-09 1996-07-10 秩父小野田株式会社 High-strength calcium silicate compact and method for producing the same
DE4004103C2 (en) 1990-02-10 1995-04-06 Wendker Leichtmetall U Leichtb Wall element for external building walls and method for producing a wall element
US5017232A (en) 1990-03-13 1991-05-21 Miceli Joseph J Pomice containing composition
FR2660218B1 (en) * 1990-04-02 1992-06-05 Philippe Pichat PROCESS FOR THE INCINERATION OF WASTE.
JP2829093B2 (en) 1990-04-25 1998-11-25 株式会社竹中工務店 Fireproof coating
AU7962291A (en) 1990-05-18 1991-12-10 E. Khashoggi Industries Hydraulically bonded cement compositions and their methods of manufacture and use
US5561173A (en) 1990-06-19 1996-10-01 Carolyn M. Dry Self-repairing, reinforced matrix materials
JP2507028Y2 (en) 1990-06-25 1996-08-14 松下電工株式会社 Exterior material connection fittings
AU108976S (en) 1990-07-23 1990-09-12 Structual cladding
FR2665698B1 (en) * 1990-08-10 1993-09-10 Conroy Michel COMPLETE CEMENT MIXTURE WITH SELECTED AGGREGATES, FOR OBTAINING MORTAR OR CONCRETE WITHOUT WITHDRAWAL, SELF-SMOOTHING AND SELF-LEVELING.
US5067675A (en) 1990-08-13 1991-11-26 Gsw Inc. Fascia angle adapter for an eavestrough system
DE69103500T2 (en) 1990-09-10 1994-12-08 Manville Corp Lightweight board.
US5076986A (en) 1990-10-03 1991-12-31 Ceram Sna Inc. Process for manufacturing a composite material
AU639096B2 (en) 1990-10-03 1993-07-15 Ian Thomas Howe Panel mounting
US5198052A (en) * 1990-10-22 1993-03-30 Domtar, Inc. Method of reshaping a gypsum board core and products made by same
US5139049A (en) 1990-11-15 1992-08-18 Aeroquip Corporation Refrigeration system service adapter
DE4100386A1 (en) 1991-01-09 1992-07-16 Hilti Ag IN THE PRESENCE OF WATER BINDING MASS AND ITS USE
DE4104919A1 (en) 1991-02-18 1992-08-20 Dennert Kg Veit Hydrothermally hardened brick - contg amorphous silicate , limestone and opt. expanded clay or glass granulate
GB2252987A (en) 1991-02-19 1992-08-26 Impiz Pty Ltd Imitation weatherboarding
US5224318A (en) 1991-02-19 1993-07-06 Kemerer W James Molded protective exterior weather-resistant building panels
DE4106010C1 (en) 1991-02-26 1992-03-05 Eurit Bauelemente Gmbh, 8716 Dettelbach, De
US5245811A (en) 1991-03-14 1993-09-21 William L. Knorr Wall framing clip system
DE4108221C2 (en) * 1991-03-14 1998-09-03 Festo Ag & Co Sealing ring
US5201787A (en) 1991-05-31 1993-04-13 Usg Interiors, Inc. Trim system for suspension ceilings
JP2635884B2 (en) 1991-06-25 1997-07-30 日本国土開発株式会社 Concrete composition
US5268226A (en) 1991-07-22 1993-12-07 Diversitech Corporation Composite structure with waste plastic core and method of making same
JP2538120Y2 (en) 1991-07-25 1997-06-11 松下電工株式会社 Wall panel mounting structure
US5198275A (en) * 1991-08-15 1993-03-30 Klein Gerald B Card stock sheets with improved severance means
CH684285A5 (en) 1991-09-18 1994-08-15 Bostitch Ag Fastening element for driving into wood
AU117138S (en) 1991-10-10 1993-05-21 Connecting member for building frame
US5155958A (en) 1991-10-17 1992-10-20 Huff James C Fastening and support system for architectural panels
NZ240533A (en) 1991-11-08 1996-07-26 Ian Thomas Howe Mounting section for soffit panel ; channel with opposed walls of different length
US5319909A (en) 1991-12-13 1994-06-14 Singleterry David S Tool for lap siding installation
US5482550A (en) * 1991-12-27 1996-01-09 Strait; Mark C. Structural building unit and method of making the same
SE505797C2 (en) * 1991-12-30 1997-10-13 Nils Gunnar Jansson Apparatus for setting up facade elements of glass
US5229437A (en) 1991-12-31 1993-07-20 The Gibson-Homans Company Encapsulating material for asbestos tile
GB2264393A (en) 1992-02-22 1993-08-25 Mckechnie Uk Ltd Keyboard
US5305568A (en) * 1992-03-05 1994-04-26 Comcore Utilities Products High strength, light weight shoring panel and method of preparing same
DE4209834C2 (en) 1992-03-26 1996-04-04 Dieter Brich Glass facade on a supporting structure
US5475961A (en) 1992-03-27 1995-12-19 National Gypsum Company Vertical post assembly
ATA70592A (en) 1992-04-03 1996-02-15 Alcatel Austria Ag POSITIONING DEVICE FOR ASSEMBLING PCBS
CH687399A5 (en) * 1992-04-06 1996-11-29 Eidgenoessische Materialpruefung Method and apparatus for Schubverstaerkung on a building part.
US5743056A (en) * 1992-04-10 1998-04-28 Balla-Goddard; Michael Steven Andrew Building panel and buildings made therefrom
US5323581A (en) * 1992-04-30 1994-06-28 Jakel Karl W Lightweight cementitious roofing
US5210989A (en) 1992-05-12 1993-05-18 Jakel Karl W Lightweight cementitious roofing, tapered and recessed
DE4228338A1 (en) 1992-04-21 1993-10-28 Hoepner Hans Dr Building wall with front panel facade - has each panel with several parallel, horizontal, longitudinal grooves on building facing rear side
US5297370A (en) 1992-04-23 1994-03-29 John Greenstreet Panel system and clean rooms constructed therefrom
US5465547A (en) 1992-04-30 1995-11-14 Jakel; Karl W. Lightweight cementitious roofing
US5334242A (en) 1992-05-04 1994-08-02 Toole Mark J O Baking stone and method of manufacture thereof
US5282317A (en) * 1992-05-19 1994-02-01 Doris Carter Tissue pattern paper
US5425986A (en) 1992-07-21 1995-06-20 Masco Corporation High pressure laminate structure
GB9216029D0 (en) 1992-07-28 1992-09-09 Sto Ind Canada Inc Exterior insulation and finish system
US5631097A (en) 1992-08-11 1997-05-20 E. Khashoggi Industries Laminate insulation barriers having a cementitious structural matrix and methods for their manufacture
US5545297A (en) 1992-08-11 1996-08-13 E. Khashoggi Industries Methods for continuously placing filaments within hydraulically settable compositions being extruded into articles of manufacture
US5580409A (en) 1992-08-11 1996-12-03 E. Khashoggi Industries Methods for manufacturing articles of manufacture from hydraulically settable sheets
US5694727A (en) 1992-08-12 1997-12-09 Commercial And Architectural Products, Inc. Wall system providing an array of individual panels
US5338349A (en) 1992-08-27 1994-08-16 Firecomp, Inc. Fire resistant and high temperature insulating composition
US5391245A (en) * 1992-09-21 1995-02-21 Turner; Terry A. Fire-resistant building component
US5428931A (en) 1992-09-21 1995-07-04 Ragsdale; James J. Laminated construction modular system
JPH06123158A (en) * 1992-10-13 1994-05-06 Shimizu Corp Composite material for construction
CN1068087C (en) 1992-11-06 2001-07-04 东陶机器株式会社 Mechanism for connecting of decorating plates
US5349802A (en) 1992-12-29 1994-09-27 Kariniemi Stephen D Positioner/fastener
US5617690A (en) 1993-01-15 1997-04-08 Gibbs; Alden T. Slate mounting assembly
AU118448S (en) 1993-03-16 1993-10-13 An extrusion
FR2702790A1 (en) 1993-03-17 1994-09-23 Martos Julio Method and panels for the construction of lightweight concrete walls, and construction making use of this method
US5768841A (en) 1993-04-14 1998-06-23 Swartz & Kulpa, Structural Design And Engineering Wallboard structure
AU686135B2 (en) 1993-04-29 1998-02-05 Tecrete Industries Pty Ltd Building block
US5369924A (en) 1993-04-30 1994-12-06 Neudorf; Peter Structural curtainwall system and components therefor
AU118862S (en) 1993-05-10 1993-11-25 Saddington P W & Sons Pty Ltd A lintel
DE9307530U1 (en) 1993-05-18 1994-09-29 Sto Verotec Gmbh Facade panel
US5352288A (en) 1993-06-07 1994-10-04 Dynastone Lc Low-cost, high early strength, acid-resistant pozzolanic cement
AU677649B2 (en) 1993-06-11 1997-05-01 Nabil Nasri Gazal A sandwich panel
TW255851B (en) 1993-06-12 1995-09-01 Fwu-Chyuan Jang Assembled walls and its formation process
FR2707977B1 (en) 1993-07-01 1996-01-12 Bouygues Sa Method and composition for manufacturing concrete elements having remarkable compressive strength and fracturing energy and elements thus obtained.
US5394672A (en) * 1993-07-26 1995-03-07 Insulok Corp. Interlocking insulated roof panel system
CN1081168A (en) 1993-07-28 1994-01-26 北京市建筑工程研究所 Modified portland cement composite material and application thereof
AU122634S (en) 1993-09-16 1995-02-13 Buff Duct Pty Ltd Set of skirting board components
NZ248942A (en) 1993-10-13 1997-11-24 Ross Gavin Moore Constructing a building; form footing, place panels and then connect a perimeter beam to the inside or outside of the panel top
US5501050A (en) * 1993-10-18 1996-03-26 Ruel; Raymond Shingled tile block siding facade for buildings
US5437934A (en) 1993-10-21 1995-08-01 Permagrain Products, Inc. Coated cement board tiles
US6063856A (en) 1993-11-16 2000-05-16 Mass; Warren John Plaster material for making fresco-like finish
US6046269A (en) * 1993-11-16 2000-04-04 Warren J. Nass Method for making a fresco-like finish from cement and a coating composition and the fresco-like finish made from the method
NZ259493A (en) 1993-12-20 1997-10-24 R A R Consultants Ltd A building panel has members connected together to form a stressed frame, with a castable substance in the interior of the panel
US5461839A (en) 1993-12-22 1995-10-31 Certainteed Corporation Reinforced exterior siding
US6415574B2 (en) 1993-12-22 2002-07-09 Certainteed Corp. Reinforced exterior siding
US5724783A (en) * 1993-12-27 1998-03-10 Mandish; Theodore O. Building panel apparatus and method
US5443603A (en) 1994-01-11 1995-08-22 Washington Mills Ceramics Corporation Light weight ceramic abrasive media
WO1995021050A1 (en) * 1994-02-01 1995-08-10 Northwestern University Extruded fiber-reinforced cement matrix composites
US5505030A (en) * 1994-03-14 1996-04-09 Hardcore Composites, Ltd. Composite reinforced structures
US6134855A (en) 1994-05-13 2000-10-24 Certainteed Corporation Apparatus and method of applying building panels to surfaces
US6679011B2 (en) * 1994-05-13 2004-01-20 Certainteed Corporation Building panel as a covering for building surfaces and method of applying
US5729946A (en) * 1994-05-13 1998-03-24 Certainteed Corporation Apparatus and method of applying building panels to surfaces
TW354346B (en) * 1994-05-13 1999-03-11 Certain Teed Corp Apparatus and method of applying building panel to surfaces
US5857303A (en) * 1994-05-13 1999-01-12 Certainteed Corporation Apparatus and method of applying building panels to surfaces
US6000185A (en) 1994-05-13 1999-12-14 Certainteed Corporation Apparatus and method of applying building panels to surfaces
CA2123764A1 (en) 1994-05-17 1995-11-18 Fu-Chuan Chang Light weight wall structure for use in buildings
US5564245A (en) 1994-05-18 1996-10-15 Rademacher; Richard J. Hangers for siding
IL110401A0 (en) 1994-07-21 1994-10-21 Mizrahi Yehuda System for cladding building walls
US5557903A (en) 1994-08-01 1996-09-24 Haddock; Robert M. M. Mounting clip for paneled roof
US5634314A (en) 1994-08-03 1997-06-03 Tommy Wayne Hollis Trim clip for siding
US5558710A (en) 1994-08-08 1996-09-24 Usg Interiors, Inc. Gypsum/cellulosic fiber acoustical tile composition
AU123141S (en) 1994-08-16 1995-04-03 Marley Tile Ag Joining strip
AU123142S (en) 1994-08-16 1995-04-03 Marley Tile Ag Joining strip
US5968257A (en) 1994-08-29 1999-10-19 Sandia Corporation Ultrafine cementitious grout
JPH0874358A (en) 1994-09-02 1996-03-19 Yoshino Sekko Kk Partition wall
US5511316A (en) * 1994-09-22 1996-04-30 Fischer; Rory T. Stencil for cutting sandpaper
US5648144A (en) 1994-09-28 1997-07-15 Maurer; Ronald L. Synthetic slate roofing member
DE9416917U1 (en) 1994-10-20 1994-12-01 Hoechst Ag Fastening system for compact panels
US5564233A (en) 1994-10-21 1996-10-15 Aluma-Crown, Inc. Sliding decorative dentil structure within channel
US5425985A (en) 1994-10-28 1995-06-20 The Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company Belt construction having a mock leno fabric as an impact breaker or splice insert
US5517795A (en) 1994-11-22 1996-05-21 Doke; Jack Furring stud assembly for slotted wall
US5477617A (en) 1994-12-14 1995-12-26 Guy; John W. Carpet measurement tool
US5622556A (en) 1994-12-19 1997-04-22 Shulman; David M. Lightweight, low water content cementitious compositions and methods of their production and use
US5580378A (en) 1994-12-19 1996-12-03 Shulman; David M. Lightweight cementitious compositions and methods of their production and use
US5725652A (en) * 1994-12-19 1998-03-10 Shulman; David M. Lightweight, low water content expanded shale, clay and slate cementitious compositions and methods of their production and use
JP2641707B2 (en) * 1994-12-26 1997-08-20 工業技術院長 Manufacturing method of high-strength lightweight cement extruded product
US5718759A (en) * 1995-02-07 1998-02-17 National Gypsum Company Cementitious gypsum-containing compositions and materials made therefrom
US5598671A (en) * 1995-02-09 1997-02-04 Ting; Raymond M. L. Externally drained wall joint
AUPN141795A0 (en) 1995-02-28 1995-03-23 Quiskamp, Guenter A panel
AU681049B2 (en) 1995-02-28 1997-08-14 Guenter Quiskamp A panel
AUPN283995A0 (en) 1995-05-09 1995-06-01 Howe, Ian Thomas A decorative trim
AU702630B2 (en) 1995-05-09 1999-02-25 Ian Thomas Howe A decorative trim
US5661939A (en) 1995-05-16 1997-09-02 Associated Materials Incorporated Interlocking panel and method of making the same
US5531824A (en) 1995-05-25 1996-07-02 Burkes; J. Pate Method of increasing density and strength of highly siliceous cement-based materials
JP3783734B2 (en) 1995-05-30 2006-06-07 株式会社エーアンドエーマテリアル Calcium silicate plate manufacturing method
US5697189A (en) 1995-06-30 1997-12-16 Miller; John F. Lightweight insulated concrete wall
DE19549535C2 (en) 1995-06-30 2001-01-11 Ralf Sebald Adjustment device for placing a wall element
US5651227A (en) 1995-07-10 1997-07-29 Anderson; Carl E. Building siding with positive interlock
US5718758A (en) * 1995-08-21 1998-02-17 Breslauer; Charles S. Ultra-light high moisture retention title mortar
AUPN504095A0 (en) * 1995-08-25 1995-09-21 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Cement formulation
US5848509A (en) 1995-08-31 1998-12-15 Certainteed Corporation Encapsulated insulation assembly
US5675955A (en) 1995-09-01 1997-10-14 Champagne; Wendel James System for covering exterior building surfaces
US5603758A (en) * 1995-10-06 1997-02-18 Boral Concrete Products, Inc. Composition useful for lightweight roof tiles and method of producing said composition
NZ280409A (en) 1995-11-07 1997-06-24 William Richard Milbur Farland Construction material; comprises a material formed from a mixture including cement, at least one lightweight aggregate material and an admixture
US5766752A (en) 1995-12-07 1998-06-16 Eastman Chemical Company High pressure laminates made with paper containing cellulose acetate
USD388884S (en) 1996-01-11 1998-01-06 Wayne Karnoski Corner molding trim piece
US6049987A (en) 1997-10-06 2000-04-18 Robell; Glenn Gridded measurement system for construction materials
US5673489A (en) 1996-02-14 1997-10-07 Robell; Glenn Gridded measurement system for construction materials
US5802790A (en) 1996-02-20 1998-09-08 3429342 Canada Ltee Decorative moulding corner cap
CA2170681A1 (en) 1996-02-29 1997-08-30 Vittorio De Zen Insulated wall and components therefor
US5736594A (en) 1996-03-28 1998-04-07 B J Services Company Cementing compositions and methods using recycled expanded polystyrene
AUPO116196A0 (en) 1996-07-22 1996-08-15 Vicfam Plastics Recycling Pty. Ltd. Pallets
KR200158855Y1 (en) 1996-08-03 1999-10-15 이용우 An interior and outerior panel for the building
NZ502017A (en) 1996-09-05 2001-01-26 James Hardie Res Pty Ltd Cladding board mounting system includes resilient mounting means
AUPO215996A0 (en) 1996-09-05 1996-10-03 James Hardie International Finance B.V. An improved cladding board mounting system
CN2281378Y (en) 1996-09-13 1998-05-13 鲁杰 Wood panel for decoration
US5735092A (en) 1996-09-23 1998-04-07 Bridgestone/Firestone, Inc. Composite roofing members having improved dimensional stability and related methods
US5848508A (en) 1996-09-26 1998-12-15 Albrecht; Ronald Core for a patio enclosure wall and method of forming thereof
AUPO291296A0 (en) 1996-10-11 1996-11-07 Rudduck, Dickory Building elements
AUPO303296A0 (en) * 1996-10-16 1996-11-14 James Hardie International Finance B.V. Wall member and method of construction thereof
AU130941S (en) 1996-11-13 1997-08-19 An extrusion
AUPO389996A0 (en) 1996-11-28 1996-12-19 Verzantyoort, Timothy Wilhelmus Building element
US5732520A (en) 1996-12-10 1998-03-31 Multicoat Corporation Synthetic stucco system
US5768844A (en) 1996-12-16 1998-06-23 Norandex Building siding panels and assemblies
US5935699A (en) 1996-12-20 1999-08-10 Barber; Robert Frederick Lightweight composite material comprising hollow ceramic microspheres
US5817262A (en) 1996-12-20 1998-10-06 United States Gypsum Company Process of producing gypsum wood fiber product having improved water resistance
US5714002A (en) * 1997-02-12 1998-02-03 Mineral Resource Technologies, Llc Process for making a blended hydraulic cement
US6079175A (en) 1997-04-09 2000-06-27 Clear; Theodore E. Cementitious structural building panel
AUPO612097A0 (en) 1997-04-10 1997-05-08 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Building products
US5950319A (en) 1997-04-29 1999-09-14 Harris; David Neal Reference marking on construction materials
DE19718716C2 (en) 1997-05-02 2002-08-01 Max Gerhaher Curtain wall construction
US6122877A (en) 1997-05-30 2000-09-26 Andersen Corporation Fiber-polymeric composite siding unit and method of manufacture
US6018924A (en) 1997-08-21 2000-02-01 Tamlyn; John Thomas Adjustable reveal strip and related method of construction
US6084011A (en) 1997-08-29 2000-07-04 Lucero; Richard F. Freeze/thaw resistant cementitious adhesive for composite materials and method for production thereof
US5924213A (en) 1997-09-08 1999-07-20 Lee; Baek Woo Construction material bearing numerical measurement indicia thereon
US6012255A (en) 1997-09-09 2000-01-11 Smid; Dennis M. Construction board having a number of marks for facilitating the installation thereof and a method for fabricating such construction board
US5979135A (en) 1997-09-11 1999-11-09 Certainteed Corporation Siding panel with fabric tape attachment
CA2211984C (en) * 1997-09-12 2002-11-05 Marc-Andre Mathieu Cementitious panel with reinforced edges
US6110525A (en) 1997-09-12 2000-08-29 Pro-Sol, Inc. Coating composition for protecting surfaces and method of using same
US6316087B1 (en) * 1997-09-18 2001-11-13 Warren Lehan Synthetic structural panel and method for manufacture
KR100258600B1 (en) 1997-10-06 2000-06-15 성재갑 Melamine sheet laminated floorboard
KR100231910B1 (en) 1997-10-18 1999-12-01 김충엽 Bending and impact rigidity-reinforced panel and method for making same
US5916095A (en) * 1997-10-20 1999-06-29 Tamlyn; John Thomas Starter strip for wall construction
US6029415A (en) * 1997-10-24 2000-02-29 Abco, Inc. Laminated vinyl siding
CA2254212A1 (en) 1997-11-17 1999-05-17 F.C.P. Inc. Cementitious building panel with cut bead
US6295777B1 (en) 1997-11-19 2001-10-02 Certainteed Corporation Exterior finishing panel
DE19755545A1 (en) 1997-12-13 1999-06-17 Bayer Ag Process for the production of thermoplastic polyurethane elastomers
AU132812S (en) 1997-12-17 1998-02-09 An extrusion
AUPP104497A0 (en) 1997-12-19 1998-01-15 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Building elements
CA2227687A1 (en) 1998-02-23 1999-08-23 Raynald Doyon Exterior wall system
US6170212B1 (en) * 1998-02-23 2001-01-09 Certainteed Corporation Deck system
US5878543A (en) * 1998-03-17 1999-03-09 Associated Materials, Incorporated Interlocking siding panel
AU135557S (en) 1998-03-20 1998-11-03 Rob Int Pty Ltd A metal section
AU135097S (en) 1998-03-31 1998-09-21 Air Design Pty Ltd Corner joiner
US5946870A (en) 1998-04-14 1999-09-07 Vinyl Corporation Panel support construction accessory
US5996289A (en) 1998-04-23 1999-12-07 Building Materials Corporation Of America Soffit vent
US6276107B1 (en) 1998-05-07 2001-08-21 Pacific International Tool & Shear, Ltd. Unitary modular shake-siding panels, and methods for making and using such shake-siding panels
US6016023A (en) 1998-05-12 2000-01-18 Ultra Sonus Ab Tubular ultrasonic transducer
US6026616A (en) * 1998-05-20 2000-02-22 Gibson; J. W. Eave Cladding
US6423167B1 (en) 1998-06-05 2002-07-23 Premark Rwp Holdings Method for controlling laminate gloss
US6170214B1 (en) * 1998-06-09 2001-01-09 Kenneth Treister Cladding system
US6176920B1 (en) * 1998-06-12 2001-01-23 Smartboard Building Products Inc. Cementitious structural panel and method of its manufacture
JP4018243B2 (en) 1998-06-22 2007-12-05 ミサワホーム株式会社 Exterior wall decorative member fixture
KR100274218B1 (en) 1998-07-24 2000-12-15 정승섭 Color rock insulating board for inter or exterior of building and method for fabricating and constructing the same
JP2000043196A (en) 1998-07-27 2000-02-15 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Wooden decorative panel and production thereof
JP3115273B2 (en) 1998-07-29 2000-12-04 ニチハ株式会社 Construction method and construction structure of building board
GB2340071A (en) 1998-08-01 2000-02-16 Kestrel Building Products Limi Ancillary trim for a PVC-UE board
IT1306421B1 (en) 1998-08-06 2001-06-06 Paolo Bacchielli PLASTERBOARD PANEL WITH GUIDES, FOR THE REALIZATION OF COATING ELEMENTS OF ANY SIZE AND SHAPING, QUICKLY
NZ331336A (en) 1998-08-13 2001-04-27 Fletcher Challenge Ltd Fascia comprising a clip at the upper edge and a flange on the lower edge carrying a soffit receiving member
JP2000064554A (en) 1998-08-20 2000-02-29 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Wall panel
US6161353A (en) 1998-09-24 2000-12-19 Negola; Edward Backerboard for ceramic tiles and the like
JP4126778B2 (en) 1998-10-09 2008-07-30 Jsr株式会社 Building materials
AU137291S (en) 1998-10-12 1999-05-19 Itw Australia Pty Ltd Bracket
US6319456B1 (en) 1998-11-12 2001-11-20 Certainteed Corporation Method for continuous vacuum forming shaped polymeric articles
AU137791S (en) 1998-11-20 1999-07-20 Itw Australia Pty Ltd Bracket
JP2000154612A (en) 1998-11-20 2000-06-06 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Eave soffit bearing structure
US6315489B1 (en) 1998-11-30 2001-11-13 Nichiha Corporation Fastening member
AU1924400A (en) 1998-12-01 2000-06-19 Construction Specialties, Inc. Wall protection assemblies
JP4040774B2 (en) 1998-12-11 2008-01-30 東京ライン株式会社 Ventilated roof structure and ventilation tiles
US6357193B1 (en) * 1998-12-17 2002-03-19 Diversi-Plast Products, Inc. Roof batten
DE19858342C1 (en) 1998-12-17 2000-02-03 Kalksandstein Werk Wemding Gmb Cement-free molded product, for sound or thermal insulation or fireproofing, comprises a hydrothermally hardened mixture of lime-based component and hollow silicate micro-spheres
AU140607S (en) 1999-02-03 2000-05-15 Ssg Winton Pty Ltd An extrusion
US6610358B1 (en) 1999-03-12 2003-08-26 Premark Rwp Holdings, Inc. System and method for two sided sheet treating
NZ334918A (en) 1999-03-30 2000-08-25 William Laurence Mckenzie Fascia system including a support bracket
AUPP980399A0 (en) * 1999-04-16 1999-05-13 James Hardie International Finance B.V. Method and apparatus for attaching building sheets
JP2000302522A (en) 1999-04-21 2000-10-31 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Production of fiber reinforced cement board
US6308486B1 (en) 1999-04-22 2001-10-30 Thomas Medland Surface cladding system
US6298626B2 (en) 1999-05-06 2001-10-09 Edward P. Rudden Interlocking insulated siding and method
US6290769B1 (en) 1999-06-22 2001-09-18 Siplast, Inc. Lightweight insulating concrete and method for using same
US6277189B1 (en) 1999-08-31 2001-08-21 The Board Of Trustees Of Southern Illinois University Coal combustion by-products-based lightweight structural materials and processes for making them
KR200172372Y1 (en) 1999-09-01 2000-03-15 진형장 Reinforcing panel for concrete structure
US6170215B1 (en) * 1999-09-10 2001-01-09 Evert Edward Nasi Siding panel with interlock
EP1228277B2 (en) 1999-10-07 2012-08-01 HHI A/S af 3. maj 2004 Wallboard sheet including aerated concrete core
MY125251A (en) 1999-10-08 2006-07-31 James Hardie Int Finance B V Fiber-cement/gypsum laminate composite building material
AUPQ375599A0 (en) 1999-10-29 1999-11-25 Quiskamp, Guenter Skirting corner element
CA2287909C (en) 1999-10-29 2003-02-18 Herculete Canada Limited Building panel
US6551694B1 (en) * 1999-11-12 2003-04-22 Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. Thermosetting resin decorative board and method of producing the same
US6689451B1 (en) * 1999-11-19 2004-02-10 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Pre-finished and durable building material
NZ502004A (en) 1999-12-21 2002-08-28 James Hardie New Zealand Ltd A wall cladding support with a ribbed mid section and longitudinal recess of either side of the ribbed section
JP3529312B2 (en) 1999-12-24 2004-05-24 ニチハ株式会社 Building board fastening structure
US6367208B1 (en) * 2000-01-10 2002-04-09 Jerome Campbell Composite foundation post
US6367220B1 (en) 2000-02-03 2002-04-09 Associated Materials, Incorporated Clip for siding panel
JP3388437B2 (en) * 2000-02-18 2003-03-24 大日本印刷株式会社 Decorative sheet
US6539643B1 (en) 2000-02-28 2003-04-01 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Surface groove system for building sheets
NZ521491A (en) 2000-03-14 2004-06-25 James Hardie Res Pty Ltd Fiber cement building materials with low density additives and cellulose fibers
DE20006112U1 (en) 2000-04-03 2000-07-06 Rockwool Mineralwolle Building wall
US6550210B1 (en) * 2000-05-04 2003-04-22 Certainteed Corporation Window frame member with channel formed within the member for accepting siding or sheathing
JP2001336230A (en) 2000-05-29 2001-12-07 Kuwazawa:Kk Furring strips
NZ505799A (en) 2000-07-19 2003-02-28 Peter Wilmot Seton Decorative wall or ceiling system comprised of a grid of elongate members
JP2002047750A (en) 2000-08-03 2002-02-15 Sankyo Alum Ind Co Ltd Exterior wall structural body
AUPQ921000A0 (en) 2000-08-04 2000-08-31 Martin, Vincent Michael Composite wall panel
US6346416B1 (en) * 2000-08-29 2002-02-12 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense inhibition of HPK/GCK-like kinase expression
JP2002097732A (en) 2000-09-22 2002-04-05 Daishu Kensetsu:Kk Longitudinal furring strip for building and exterior wall structure using it
CA2423734A1 (en) 2000-09-27 2002-04-04 Hiltive Pty Limited Building panel, assembly and method
AU2003204739B2 (en) 2000-09-27 2005-01-20 Hiltive Pty Limited Building panel, assembly and method
US6626947B2 (en) 2000-10-03 2003-09-30 Depuy Orthopaedics, Inc. Press fit acetabular cup and associated method for securing the cup to an acetabulum
WO2002028795A2 (en) * 2000-10-04 2002-04-11 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Fiber cement composite materials using sized cellulose fibers
CN101089323A (en) 2000-10-10 2007-12-19 詹姆斯哈迪国际财金公司 Composite building material
CA2424707A1 (en) * 2000-10-26 2002-05-02 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Building panel assembly having a protective film, method of making same and adhesive system for bonding the protective film
NZ508055A (en) 2000-11-08 2000-12-22 Peter Ricciotti Building moulding with side part fixed to wall and upper part abutting against cornice resiliently, to allow for relative movement between moulding and cornice
US6516580B1 (en) 2000-11-13 2003-02-11 Multicoat Corporation Synthetic stucco system with moisture absorption control
JP2002161623A (en) 2000-11-27 2002-06-04 Mitsui Home Co Ltd External-facing backing structure and external-facing backing construction method
US6688073B2 (en) 2001-01-30 2004-02-10 Chameleon Cast Wall System Llc Method of forming a composite panel
NZ528307A (en) 2001-03-02 2005-04-29 James Hardie Int Finance Bv Spattering apparatus
AU735352B3 (en) 2001-03-19 2001-07-05 Hiltive Pty Limited Building assembly and method
WO2002081841A1 (en) * 2001-04-03 2002-10-17 James Hardie Research Pty Limited Fiber cement siding planks, methods of making and installing
US20050284339A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2005-12-29 Greg Brunton Durable building article and method of making same
US6550203B1 (en) 2001-04-19 2003-04-22 Radiation Protection Products, Inc. Leak-proof lead barrier system
AUPR495901A0 (en) 2001-05-11 2001-06-07 Csr Limited Building panel
JP4599756B2 (en) 2001-05-22 2010-12-15 パナソニック株式会社 Telephone
WO2002096824A1 (en) 2001-05-29 2002-12-05 Gojo, Naamloze Vennootschap Wall element, as well as covering for walls, wall elements and the like
USD469886S1 (en) 2001-05-30 2003-02-04 Harry Barnett Extrusion or similar article
JP2002364091A (en) 2001-06-07 2002-12-18 Nippon Paper Industries Co Ltd Outer wall structure
AUPR824001A0 (en) 2001-10-12 2001-11-08 Dincel, Burak A building element
AU147568S (en) 2001-12-04 2002-04-26 Tiltform Design & Dev Pty Ltd Formwork corner connector
US6901713B2 (en) 2002-01-03 2005-06-07 Erich Jason Axsom Multipurpose composite wallboard panel
US8453399B2 (en) 2002-03-13 2013-06-04 Battens Plus, Inc. Roof batten
US20030172606A1 (en) 2002-03-13 2003-09-18 Anderson Ted F. Roof batten
AU2003204418A1 (en) 2002-05-28 2003-12-18 Ron Hanley Building member and cladding system
DE10226176A1 (en) 2002-06-12 2003-12-24 Basf Ag Components made of lightweight concrete, in particular for building construction, and methods for increasing the pressure resistance of a component made of lightweight concrete
JP2004027497A (en) 2002-06-21 2004-01-29 Sekisui House Ltd Eaves back corner
AU148485S (en) 2002-07-10 2002-07-19 Workplace Access & Safety Pty Ltd An extruded section
AU2003901529A0 (en) 2003-03-31 2003-05-01 James Hardie International Finance B.V. A durable high performance fibre cement product and method of making the same
US7028436B2 (en) 2002-11-05 2006-04-18 Certainteed Corporation Cementitious exterior sheathing product with rigid support member
US7089709B2 (en) 2002-12-04 2006-08-15 Shear Tech, Inc. Siding having indicia defining a fastening zone
AU2003257906A1 (en) 2002-12-20 2004-07-08 Carter Holt Harvey Limited Cladding Assemblies and Methods (Flash/Clad TM Procedures)
US6913819B2 (en) 2002-12-27 2005-07-05 Christine E. Wallner Cementitious veneer and laminate material
JP2006518323A (en) 2003-01-09 2006-08-10 ジェイムズ ハーディー インターナショナル ファイナンス ベスローテン フェンノートシャップ Fiber cement composites using bleached cellulose fibers
AU2003900205A0 (en) 2003-01-17 2003-01-30 Csr Limited A batten
USD489137S1 (en) 2003-04-11 2004-04-27 Framerica Corporation Moulding
AU152915S (en) 2003-06-04 2003-08-25 Workplace Access & Safety Pty Ltd An extruded section
AU2003903440A0 (en) 2003-07-04 2003-07-17 James Hardie International Finance B.V. Rainscreen apparatus and method
WO2005019549A1 (en) 2003-08-20 2005-03-03 Incoribe, S.L. Building construction system
AU153495S (en) 2003-08-25 2003-10-28 Building Solutions Pty Ltd An extrusion
AU153493S (en) 2003-08-25 2003-10-28 Hardie James Technology Ltd An extrusion
AU153496S (en) 2003-08-25 2003-10-28 Building Solutions Pty Ltd An extrusion
AU153491S (en) 2003-08-25 2003-10-28 Hardie James Technology Ltd An extrusion
AU153494S (en) 2003-08-25 2003-10-28 Building Solutions Pty Ltd An extrusion
CA2542738A1 (en) 2003-10-13 2005-04-21 Soo-Chang Moon Fiber reinforced cement board and foam plastic insulated stay in place forms systems with perforated metal stud for concrete reinforced structure
JP4149352B2 (en) 2003-10-24 2008-09-10 矢崎総業株式会社 Junction block connection structure
NZ529744A (en) 2003-11-24 2005-09-30 Kevin Allan Saunders A fire retardant floor assembly
NZ536867A (en) 2003-11-28 2006-04-28 James Hardie Int Finance Bv Eave lining system for buildings
JP4711971B2 (en) 2004-01-20 2011-06-29 ジェットストーン・ビルディング・システムズ・プロプリエタリー・リミテッド Composite component and method for manufacturing composite component
WO2005078210A1 (en) 2004-02-11 2005-08-25 Hiltive Pty Limited Building assembly component
US20080163582A1 (en) 2004-02-27 2008-07-10 James Hardie International Finance B.V. Batten Mounting Water Management System
CA2584203A1 (en) 2004-10-14 2006-04-20 James Hardie International Finance B.V. Cavity wall system
NZ536129A (en) 2004-10-26 2006-02-24 Graeme Bruce Webster Ventilating building sheet batten

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2413794A (en) * 1944-10-26 1947-01-07 Elden P Reising Securement means for shingle and siding units
US6122876A (en) * 1994-03-29 2000-09-26 James Hardie Research Pty. Limited Cladding board

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7993570B2 (en) 2002-10-07 2011-08-09 James Hardie Technology Limited Durable medium-density fibre cement composite
US8993462B2 (en) 2006-04-12 2015-03-31 James Hardie Technology Limited Surface sealed reinforced building element
US9624675B2 (en) 2013-01-27 2017-04-18 Fiber Cement Foam Systems Insulation, LLC Method and device to attach building siding boards

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
BR0208621A (en) 2004-04-27
WO2002081842A1 (en) 2002-10-17
CN1513073A (en) 2004-07-14
CN1513074A (en) 2004-07-14
JP4020385B2 (en) 2007-12-12
EP1377717A1 (en) 2004-01-07
KR100793106B1 (en) 2008-01-10
KR20040012745A (en) 2004-02-11
JP2004524463A (en) 2004-08-12
KR100853733B1 (en) 2008-08-25
AR033689A1 (en) 2004-01-07
CN1308560C (en) 2007-04-04
CA2443344A1 (en) 2002-10-17
CZ20032808A3 (en) 2004-04-14
CN1252364C (en) 2006-04-19
CA2442840A1 (en) 2002-10-17
CN1513075A (en) 2004-07-14
NZ528776A (en) 2006-08-31
EP1379738A1 (en) 2004-01-14
BR0208622A (en) 2005-02-01
EP1377718A1 (en) 2004-01-07
JP2004524465A (en) 2004-08-12
CA2443348A1 (en) 2002-10-17
AU2008203453A1 (en) 2008-08-28
MXPA03009032A (en) 2004-02-12
AU2002248751B2 (en) 2008-08-14
MXPA03009031A (en) 2004-02-12
EP1377716A1 (en) 2004-01-07
AU2002250516B2 (en) 2008-04-03
US20030056458A1 (en) 2003-03-27
EP1377718B1 (en) 2013-06-12
AR034032A1 (en) 2004-01-21
PL364456A1 (en) 2004-12-13
JP4117732B2 (en) 2008-07-16
BR0208620A (en) 2004-04-27
CN100354490C (en) 2007-12-12
KR100807998B1 (en) 2008-02-28
MXPA03009030A (en) 2004-02-12
NZ528775A (en) 2005-03-24
US8409380B2 (en) 2013-04-02
JP2004524464A (en) 2004-08-12
US20030054123A1 (en) 2003-03-20
KR20030094322A (en) 2003-12-11
JP2004524466A (en) 2004-08-12
AU2002248752B2 (en) 2008-08-14
US20030046891A1 (en) 2003-03-13
WO2002081841A1 (en) 2002-10-17
US7713615B2 (en) 2010-05-11
CA2443348C (en) 2010-10-19
JP4020384B2 (en) 2007-12-12
MXPA03009029A (en) 2004-02-12
AR033690A1 (en) 2004-01-07
NZ528779A (en) 2005-03-24
KR20030094323A (en) 2003-12-11
AU2002250529B2 (en) 2008-09-25
CA2443158A1 (en) 2002-10-17
AU2008203471A1 (en) 2008-08-28
JP4020311B2 (en) 2007-12-12
AR033111A1 (en) 2003-12-03
US20090283201A1 (en) 2009-11-19
WO2002081839A1 (en) 2002-10-17
NZ528777A (en) 2006-03-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7713615B2 (en) Reinforced fiber cement article and methods of making and installing the same
AU2002248752A1 (en) Two-piece siding plank, methods of making and installing
AU2002250516A1 (en) Reinforced fiber cement article, methods of making and installing
AU2002248751A1 (en) Spline for siding planks, methods of making and installing
AU2002250529A1 (en) Fiber cement siding planks, methods of making and installing
EP1639213B1 (en) Building structure
CA2642683A1 (en) Structural boards having integrated water drainage channels

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ CZ DE DE DK DK DM DZ EC EE EE ES FI FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ OM PH PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1-2003-500960

Country of ref document: PH

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2443158

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2002579591

Country of ref document: JP

Ref document number: 1020037013034

Country of ref document: KR

Ref document number: PA/A/2003/009031

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 528776

Country of ref document: NZ

Ref document number: 2002248752

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2002717770

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 028111680

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2002717770

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642